JP6539042B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which symbols are displayed in a stopped manner in a mode representing the results of a lottery after symbol display is performed when a lottery trigger occurs during a game.

  Conventionally, if the result of the lottery corresponds to a big hit as a game machine of this type, a big hit game can be started after a symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, and a large number of balls can be obtained. In addition, the big hit game is started according to the type of big hit, the number of balls that can be obtained may be different depending on the type of big hit. Here, when a lottery opportunity occurs, the result of the lottery is determined first, and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is confirmed and the design award obtainable by the confirmed big hit game is confirmed There is known a gaming machine which suggests a ball number or a ball hitting number due to a big hit game on a rendering symbol display device as a pre-reading effect before the big hit occurs (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, if the sum of the scheduled payout number of balls in the big hit game played through the symbol variation game currently being executed and the scheduled payout number of balls in the big hit game performed based on the hold is greater than a predetermined number, There is known a gaming machine in which a symbol variation display effect currently being executed is replaced with a special effect (e.g., Patent Document 2). Also, as a notification method of big hit (so-called first hit) in a normal state, the number of times the high probability time shortening state is continuously set until the big hit after the big hit falls a predetermined number of times, a value representing the so-called limiter upper limit number There is known a notification method to be displayed in (for example, Patent Document 3). In addition, there is known a gaming machine which notifies a player of the number of earned balls obtained in a earned ball operation processing during a big hit game (for example, Patent Document 4).

JP, 2014-110915, A JP, 2013-153784, A Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-82471 JP, 2010-35664, A

  In the prior art described above, even if the big hit continues to increase the number of balls gained, the number of changes required to produce the big hit is not displayed, and the current situation is early after the big hit game is over There was a problem that it was not possible to intuitively know whether the situation in which the big hit would occur in the stage was good or the bad situation in which the big hit did not occur easily, and could not suppress the decline in interest for the game.

  Then, this invention makes it a subject to provide the technique which can suppress the fall of the interest to a game by making it easy to intuitively recognize the generation | occurrence | production situation of a big hit.

The present invention adopts the following solutions in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. In addition, the wording in the following parenthesis is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution means 1: The gaming machine of this solution means, when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game, an internal lottery executing means for executing an internal lottery, and when the internal lottery is executed, a predetermined fluctuation of the symbol is triggered by this. A special game is executed when a symbol display means for stopping and displaying a symbol in a mode representing the result of the internal lottery after being variably displayed over time and a symbol being stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode by the symbol display means After performing the fluctuation display effect to variably display a combination of a plurality of effect design symbols corresponding to the fluctuation display of the symbol within the fluctuation time, in the fluctuation display of the symbol by the game execution means and the symbol display means, Figure that executes the result display effect of the aspect that combines all of the multiple effect symbols in the stop display state in accordance with the stop display mode of the symbol by the symbol display means The first result of counting the number of special game variations, which is the number of variations in which the variation display of symbols required for the execution of the next special game after the execution of the special game is performed. The first variation count history information representing the history can be notified at the time of the variation display effect after the next execution of the special game, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variation count history information, and The second variation count history information representing the history of the second result counting the special game variation counts before the execution of the special game is made to coexist in sequence, and before and after each of the special game variation counts according to those counting results It is a gaming machine characterized by further comprising: special effect execution means for executing a fluctuation number history effect which makes it possible to notify of a step degree based on a relation.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of the present solution.
(1) A condition for starting an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) (acquisition of random number information) is established based on the lottery trigger occurring during the game (the game ball enters the start winning opening). The lottery determination (determination of the result of the random number information) is performed in response to the predetermined lottery start state being satisfied (not currently in the process of the internal lottery process). For this reason, the player plays a game with the goal of causing the game ball to enter the start winning opening which is a chance of this lottery.

(2) When the internal lottery of (1) is executed, the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes some time (variation time and stop display time) until the stop display is performed after the variable display of the pattern is started, and once the variable display of the design is started, the stop display is completed It is not done to determine the result of the next internal lottery until you do. In addition, when a predetermined pre-reading condition is satisfied, it may be made to perform temporary judgment concerning an internal lottery which will be in an unprocessed state based on the change display of the symbol concerned as prior advance judgment.

(3) When the result of the internal lottery of (1) corresponds to winning, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined winning mode according to (2), a special game (big hit game) is executed. The player can obtain a certain amount of profits (balls) by this special game. Specifically, a predetermined movable character (so-called, an attacker, etc.) operates until a predetermined condition is achieved, and when the game ball enters the large winning opening or the general winning opening based on this operation, a winning is achieved. Occurs, and the winning balls (balls) are paid out along with the winnings. In addition, a plurality of operation patterns (for example, the number of opening and opening time of the winning opening, etc.) for operating the movable combination are provided, and the operation pattern of the aspect according to the content type of the winning result of internal lottery is determined. It is also possible to differentiate the amount of profit (play) obtained by (big hit game).

(4) During the variable display of symbols in (2) above, each of a plurality (for example, three) of rendering symbols (left rendering symbol, middle rendering symbol, right rendering symbol) adjacent to each other in the liquid crystal screen, The variable display effect of performing variable display sequentially is executed based on a predetermined symbol array. Then, when the symbols are stopped and displayed based on the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time to be displayed fluctuatingly, all the effect symbols are also stopped and displayed. The player recognizes that the combination when the effect pattern is stopped and displayed is, for example, a big hit if it is "7-7-7", and it is an off if it is "7-6-7." can do. Each of a plurality of rendering symbols (left rendering symbol, middle rendering symbol, right rendering symbol) is, for example, a configuration in which a number consisting of one digit each of “0” to “9” and a character corresponding to the number In the variable display effect, independent variable display is performed for each of the rendering symbols. For example, an effect is performed in which three-digit effect design symbols adjacent to each other such as “0”, “1”, “2”, etc. scroll independently in the vertical and horizontal directions.

(5) When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit game is executed during the time reduction state), the next special game (third big hit) after the execution of the special game (second big hit game) this time The number of special game variations is counted, which is the number of variations in which the variation display of the symbol required until the game is executed is performed. In addition, at the time of the variable display effect after the execution of the next special game (third big hit game), fluctuation frequency history information (for example, it is necessary until the next special game is executed) which represents the history of the counted first result It is possible to notify of the numerical value of the number of fluctuations of the symbol that has been Furthermore, change count history information representing the history of the second result counting the number of special game changes in the special game (first big hit game) before the execution of the special game (second big hit game) is made to coexist in sequence Further, it is possible to notify of the degree of stage based on the front and back relation for each of the special game fluctuation numbers according to the counting result (the first result and the second result). Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit game is executed during a time reduction state), a special game (hereinafter, also referred to as a consecutive hit big hit) which is continuously executed in time series is executed Each variation count history information based on the variation count of the symbol required is displayed in parallel and displayed one by one, and based on the variation count history information, it took to generate a big hit against the progress degree of the game after consecutive big hit An effect representing a step history relating to a period is performed.

  In the present invention, the special game (first big hit game) before execution of the current special game (second big hit game) is a continuous special game (previous special game, when the predetermined conditions are continuously satisfied, It is possible to include all of the last special game, the last special game ..., etc.), or a predetermined number of consecutive special games (for example, based on the latest counting result) , You can also be limited to the last and the last two special games only). In this way, the player can intuitively compare and recognize the degree of stage related to the period required to generate each big hit at the time of the variable display effect of the production design after the big hit, and the interest for the future game can be enjoyed Can be suppressed.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of this solution is characterized in that, in the solution 1, the special effect execution means executes the variable display of the symbol after the execution of the special game this time a predetermined number of times The upper limit number of times is divided into a plurality of divided ranges based on the upper limit number so as to correspond to the value of the special game variation number according to the count until the next special game is executed, When notifying the first change frequency history information and the second change frequency history information, the effect mode is divided according to the order range division of the number group based on the correspondence result of the value of the special game change frequency related to counting According to another aspect of the invention, there is provided a gaming machine which executes the fluctuation number history effect which enables notification.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of the present solution.
The upper limit number of times is the case where variable display of symbols since execution of the special game this time (for example, stop display of symbols resulting in consecutive lost lottery results) is executed a plurality of predetermined times (for example, 170 times) To divide the number of times divided into multiple groups based on the upper limit number of times to correspond to the value of the special game variation number according to the count until the next special game is executed (for example, 1 to 45 times of the first It is possible to set division range, division range of 46 times to 90 times of second division, and 91 times to 170 times of third division.
And, when notifying the number of times of fluctuation history information, the division range division of the number of times group based on the correspondence result of the value of the counted special game fluctuation number (for example, the range of whether it is the first division to the third division described above Staged-degree presentation is performed that enables different notifications to be made separately according to presentation modes according to.

For example, an effect representing a stage relating to a period required to generate the next big hit with respect to the degree of progress of the game after the consecutive big hit is performed by the color to be displayed.
As a specific example, when teaching the variation count history information of the variation count required to generate the next big hit, the variation count history information (for example, the icon display according to the numerical teaching of the special game variation count) or the periphery thereof Is displayed in red if the display color is different (including the color change of the icon display itself) and the number of changes required to generate the next big hit (for example, in the case of the first division described above) is small. When the number of changes is large (for example, in the case of the third division described above), it is displayed in blue, and when the number of changes is about the middle (for example, in the case of the second division described above), it is displayed in green.

As a result, if the variation count history information or the color around it is red, it is assumed that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode at an early period stage after the execution of the special game, and the condition of the game is good. It can be intuitively recognized by the player.
Besides, if the color is blue, it is assumed that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode in a late period after the execution of the special game, and the player can intuitively recognize that the condition of the game is bad. If it is green, it is assumed that the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner in a medium period stage after the execution of the special game, and the player can intuitively recognize that the condition of the game is a buzz.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of this solution is characterized in that, in solution 1 or 2, the special effect execution device is predetermined based on the first result and the second result obtained by counting the number of times of special game change. In the case of satisfying the specific condition which is the range of permutation of the number of times corresponding to the value of the special game fluctuation frequency less than the prescribed fluctuation frequency, it indicates that the degree of the stage at which the next special game is executed is early. It is a game machine characterized by enabling notification of a special effect mode.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of the present solution.
The value of the special game fluctuation frequency (for example, the upper limit frequency) less than the predetermined fluctuation frequency previously determined based on the first result of counting the special game fluctuation frequency this time and the second result of counting the special game fluctuation frequency last time In the case where the specific condition that becomes the permutation range division (for example, in the case of the above-mentioned first division) that each corresponds to the number of times corresponding to 45 times less than 170 times is satisfied, the degree of progress of the special game is early The notification of the special presentation aspect which represents can be made easy, and it is easy to make it easy to recognize the difference of those steps degree, and can be represented.

For example, notification of a special effect mode indicating the degree of step required to generate the next big hit with respect to the degree of progress of the game after the consecutive hit is performed by gradation display.
As a specific example, when teaching the variation count history information of the variation count that was required to generate the next big hit, the second of the variation count history information related to the nearest first result to be sequentially juxtaposed It was necessary to generate the next big hit gradually from the situation of the value with the large number of changes required to generate the next big hit in the predetermined section notification area leading to the display part of the predetermined number of variable count history information including the result When the number of times of change is changing to a state of a short value, it may be shown in a mode of changing from blue to red as gradation display (indicating stepwise change in density of display color).

Thereby, in the current game, the condition of the game related to whether the variation count after execution of each special game in the past has been stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode based on what period stage, It can be intuitively recognized whether it is changing.
In the present invention, the total sum of the special game fluctuation numbers calculated based on all or a plurality of predetermined fluctuation number history information including the latest ones that are represented by the fluctuation number history effect. It is determined that the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied based on the average according to (overall counting result) (when it becomes continuous that the number of times of the respective special effects corresponds to the value of the special game fluctuation frequency It is possible to consider.

  Solution 4: The game machine according to this solution, in any one of solutions 1 to 3, when the special game by the special game execution means is over, the winning mode of the stop display that triggered the special game is Special state setting means for setting the game state to a special state in which the winning is obtained at a higher frequency than in the normal state in which the winning is obtained at the normal frequency in the internal lottery when the condition of the special winning mode is satisfied; And normal state setting means for setting the gaming state to the normal state when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times in the special state set by the special state setting means, and the special effect execution The means counts the number of times of the special game change based on the fact that the change display effect can be executed when the game state is the special state, and the predetermined winning If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode is the special state, the special state according to the predetermined special game which is continuously executed in time series Based on the setting of the special game variation count, the first variation count history information and the second variation count history information about the result of counting the special game variation counts can be notified in parallel to represent the variation count history effect It is a game machine characterized by.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of the present solution.
When the gaming state is a special state (for example, a time shortening state), counting relating to the number of special game fluctuations is performed based on execution of the variable display effect.
Further, it may be assumed that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined winning mode is the special state (for example, the time shortening state).
And, as a result of counting the special game fluctuation frequency based on the special state (for example, time shortening state) being set according to the specified special game (continuous large hitting) which is continuously executed in time series It is possible to notify of a fluctuation number history effect which represents the fluctuation number history information of at least the first result of this time and the second result of last time in parallel.
After a special game (big hit game) of a predetermined type among multiple types, the time shortening function is activated, the gaming state is set to the time shortening state, and the lottery trigger of (1) above occurs more frequently than usual. The internal lottery will also be executed frequently.

Therefore, during the operation of the time reduction function, the next big hit will occur earlier than usual.
In addition, this time shortening function will end when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times having an upper limit of 170 times) after the big hit game, and the time shortening state (favorable gaming state) The gaming state is set from the) to the normal state (unfavorable gaming state).

Therefore, the player desires to continue the acquisition of the consecutive jackpot to execute the jackpot by the end of the time saving state, and advances the game.
Then, while the time reduction state is being performed, the number of fluctuations required to generate the next big hit is counted, and fluctuation number history information according to the first result of this time and the second result of last time is displayed.
The next big hit game is performed at an early stage (for example, 1 to 45 times) or late (for example, 91 to 170 times) as compared to 170 times when the time saving state ends. Informing the degree based on the context based on the display of the sequential presence of a plurality of fluctuation number history information indicating whether it has been performed at a moderate stage (for example, 46 to 90 times) at the latest or at the latest The possible fluctuation number history presentation is executed.

  Thus, the player intuitively determines the condition of the game related to whether or not the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode at a period stage related to the number of times of fluctuation after execution of the special game in the time saving state. It is possible to compare and recognize, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  Solution 5: The game machine according to this solution further includes a prize ball payout means for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when a prize is generated in any one of the solution means 1 to 4, and the special effect mode is If the special game is scheduled to be executed after the variable display of the symbol being executed is finished, during the execution of the variable display effect by the plurality of effect symbols, from the winning balls payout means along with the special game The special effect design symbol on which at least a part of the number of the prize ball total number scheduled to be paid out is written in place of the normal effect pattern and displayed in a variable manner, and / or all of the plurality of special effect symbols It is a gaming machine characterized in that a result display effect of an aspect combined with each other in a stop display state corresponding to the total number of balls.

  In the special effect mode that indicates that the degree of progress of the next special game is earlier than the predetermined number of times of change, the special game is scheduled to be performed after the variable display of the symbol being executed is finished. It is a case (when so-called, hit fluctuation display production is decided), during the execution of the fluctuation display production with the plural production symbols, with the special game which is made the prize easy state from the normal state the prize in the said winning easy state Total number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out from the prize ball payout means (for example, a plurality of prizes obtained when the variable prize device is activated a plurality of times) (total number of prize balls paid out for each prize in an easy-to-win state) A special effect design pattern in which at least some of the numbers of some numbers are written in place of the normal effect pattern, and / or all the special effect design patterns are paired with the total number of prize balls In the stop display state is performed as a result display effect aspects in combination with each other.

For example, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode in an early period stage of a predetermined number of changes after execution of the special game, and the condition of the game becomes good, a plurality of effects during execution of the hit change display effect When temporarily stopping a design, it is not a temporary display temporarily on reach ten pie display (such as "7 · ・ · 7") based on a normal effect design, but a special effect that allows variable display by replacing Based on the symbol, the numbers of at least some of the places are temporarily displayed temporarily on the display corresponding to the total number of prize balls (such as "20 · な ど · 0").
Alternatively, instead of stopping and displaying the symbol combination (such as "7, 7, 7," etc.) of the big hit notification based on the normal effect design, it is replaced with the special effect design that enables variable display, and the total number of balls is awarded. The stop display on the corresponding numerical display (“20.0. 0”, etc.) causes the symbols to be stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode in a period stage earlier than the prescribed number of fluctuation times predetermined after execution of the special game. And make the player intuitively recognize that the current condition is good based on the variable display effect different from usual.

  In addition, the total number of prize balls that the player pays attention to (for example, a notification including the total number of prize balls scheduled to be used for the prior determination about the contents to be added to the total number of prize balls paid out An impression can be made easy to be left as a special presentation mode using the number of balls acquired that is equal to or greater than all balls acquired up to the present state).

  According to the present invention, by making it easy to intuitively recognize the occurrence of the big hit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is the perspective view which showed the 2nd variable winning prize device and its circumference from the upper left of the front side. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball enters into a 2nd variable winning prize apparatus in opening, and a game ball does not pass a definite change area. It is a figure which shows a game ball entering into the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus in opening, and a mode that a game ball passes a probability change area | region. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball passes through the upper part of the 2nd variable winning a prize apparatus in closing. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic equipment with which a pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows concretely the procedure example of a power-off occurrence check process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 1st special symbol memory | storage update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 2nd special symbol memory | storage update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the big winning opening opening operation regarding a winning symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the structure row of a 1st special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure row of a 2nd special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol storage area shift process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of processing under special symbol stop indication. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition of big hit time variable winning a prize device management processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time special winning opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time big prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a definite variation area | region open process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of definite variation field closure processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of big hit time big prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of small hit time variable winning a prize device management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the small hit time end process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1; It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure showing the flow of reach production performed at the time of big hit (win) when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2" in a non-time shortening state. FIG. 21 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of a special effect during a winning in winning in the normal mode (1/3). FIG. 25 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of a busy special effect executed at the time of winning in the normal mode (2/3). FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of a busy special effect executed when winning in a normal mode (3/3). It is a continuous view showing an example of presentation of fireworks rush. It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect performed at the time of winning or leaving in a fireworks rush (1/4). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect performed at the time of winning or leaving in a fireworks rush (2/4). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect performed at the time of winning or losing in a fireworks rush (3/4). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect performed at the time of winning or leaving in the fireworks rush (4/4). FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a special playing effect executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to “16 round symbol”. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of presentation of coast mode. FIG. 20 is a continuous view (1/2) showing an example of a special effect to be executed when winning or losing in a fireworks rush. It is a continuous view showing an example of a special effect performed at the time of winning or leaving in the fireworks rush (2/2). FIG. 25 is a continuous view showing another special effect example executed at the time of winning or leaving in a fireworks rush (1/2). FIG. 25 is a continuous view (2/2) showing another special effect example executed when winning or losing in a fireworks rush; It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect of the 2nd special pre-reading effect (1/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect of the 2nd special pre-reading effect (2/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect of the 2nd special pre-reading effect (3/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect of the 2nd special pre-reading effect (4/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect of the 2nd special pre-reading effect (5/5). It is a figure which shows the example of an image of a time-lapse | temporal frequency history image. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of a log | history background image. It is a continuous figure showing an example of production of the 3rd special production in, when a history background image fulfills predetermined conditions. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation memory production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation memory number increase production | presentation selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production | presentation symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a production | design pattern fluctuation | variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit time change production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of fireworks rush big hit time production pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of out-of-time variation production pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit history presentation setting process at the time of fireworks rush.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game arcade operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the benefits (profits) enjoyed by the player as a result of the game are, for example, the game ball earned by the player Can be converted into gaming value based on the number of Hereinafter, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integral door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integral door unit 4 is located at the front of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (rear side) of the integral door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which a wood and a metal material are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 is a fastener such as a screw for island equipment (not shown) in the game arcade. It is fixed by using. In the vertically-rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for portions corresponding to upper and lower short sides, and metal materials are used for portions corresponding to left and right long sides.

  The integral door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and they operate in an open / close manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A uniform lock unit 9 is provided inside the right side edge (the left side edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Moreover, the locking tool which is not shown in figure is provided also in the right side edge part (back side) of the integral door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2 corresponding to this, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the united lock unit 9 on the back side thereof is combined with the lock and the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. 7 is not open.

  Further, at the right side edge of the tray unit 6, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the uniform lock unit 9 operates to allow the integral door unit 4 to be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When the whole of them is opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moving like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integral door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integral door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is exposed directly, and in this state, the manager of the game arcade can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board. Further, when the integral door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the above-mentioned gaming board unit 8 as a gaming unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-described inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integral door unit 4. The game board unit 8 is removable with respect to the inner frame assembly 7, for example, in a state where the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side. In the integral door unit 4, a vertically elongated circular window 4 a is formed at the central portion, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is attached in the window 4 a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integral door unit 4 via an attachment (not shown). A game area 8a (board, game board) is formed on the front of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space where the gaming balls can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board.

  The pan unit 6 generally has a shape projecting to the front side from the integral door unit 4, and an upper pan 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning can be stored. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. In the lower plate 6c, gaming balls that are further paid out when the upper plate 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (type connected to a CR unit), and the gaming balls borrowed by the player are received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the winning balls. Disbursed to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are disposed in the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 in a state where a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a storage IC, etc.) is inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) The game balls of (for example, 125 pieces) are lent out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is disposed on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit. Incidentally, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium in which the frequency remains by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a type not connected to the CR unit) other than the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper disc ball release button 6d is installed in front of the upper disc 6b at the upper stage position, and in the central part of the lower disc 6c in front of the lower disc chop lever 6e. Is installed. The player can cause the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray sphere removing button 6d. In addition, the player can drop the gaming ball stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge it by sliding the lower bowl pulling lever 6e, for example, in the left direction. The game balls discharged are received by, for example, a ball receiving box not shown.

  At the lower right portion of the tray unit 6, a handle unit 16 is installed. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the firing control board set 174, and can shoot (strike) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The fired game balls rise from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge and are guided by the outer band (not shown) and thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and a windmill (without reference numeral in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nail and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of frame front]
In the integral door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 are installed as components for effect. Among them, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamp 48 on the left side are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47, and the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side is incorporated in the upper right illumination unit 49. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed on the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous with the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 respectively, and these glass frame decoration lamps 52 It extends from the left and right edges of the integral door unit 4 to the front of the saucer unit 6. In the integral door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above execute effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. In the upper part of the integral door unit 4, speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are respectively incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated at the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 are to output effects sound, BGM, voice and the like (general sound) to execute effects.

  Further, at the center of the tray unit 6, a presentation switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a form in which a push-in circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it are combined. The player switches the effect contents (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating this effect switching button 45, or, for example, during the fluctuation of the symbol, or the confirmation display of the big hit, or During the jackpot game, it is possible to generate some effect (for example, an advance notice effect, a definite change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the dispensing unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the dispensing control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. Besides, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown) and the like are provided.

  The above-described dispenser unit 172 has, for example, a winning ball tank 172a and a winning ball case (without a reference numeral). Among the above, the winning ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, it is possible to store gaming balls supplied from a supply route (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through the upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the gaming balls sent from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front side.

  Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. will be output to the external electronic device ing.

  The power supply cord 164 is to be connected to a power supply device (for example, AC 24 V) installed at an island facility of the game arcade, for example, to secure the power supply (power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal similarly installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the gaming board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (no reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is disposed at the center position of the game area 8a. The game area 8a is largely divided into a left portion, a right portion and a lower portion around the effect unit 40. The left part of the gaming area 8a is the first gaming area (left hitting area) used in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time shortening state), and the right part of the gaming area 8a is the advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state) This is a second game area (right-handed area) used in the small hit gaming state, the low probability time shortening state, the high probability time shortening state, etc.). In the game area 8a, the middle start winning opening 26, the start gate 20, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device around the effect unit 40. 31 mag is distributed and installed. Among them, the start winning opening 26 is disposed at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 and the second variable winning device 31 are disposed at the right side of the game area 8a. ing. Further, the first variable winning device 30 is disposed closer to the right of the lower portion of the game area 8a. Further, the two normal winning openings 22 on the left side are disposed in the left portion of the game area 8a, and the two normal winning openings 24 on the right side are disposed in the right portion of the game area 8a.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24 or the variable start at the time of operation The winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the opening operation are entered. Here, there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly enters the middle start winning opening 26 or enters the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation, or the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the regular winning opening 24. The game ball having passed through the start gate 20 continues to flow down the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning The game balls having entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the through holes formed in the game board (plywood material forming the game board unit 8, transparent board etc.).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22 due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board), the area of the left portion in the game area 8a (left It is necessary to hit the game ball in the area (to execute so-called "left-hand strike").

  On the other hand, when entering the game ball into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right portion in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit the game ball in) (to execute so-called "right-handed").

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned variable start winning device 28 operates when the predetermined operation condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hitting manner), along therewith Entry to the right start winning opening 28a (predetermined winning opening: see FIG. 4) is enabled (normal electric role). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one opening and closing member 28b, and the opening and closing member 28b reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening 28a ( There is no gap in which the game ball can enter. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 operates, the open / close member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged to the right to open the right start winning opening 28a. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 becomes capable of entering the game ball, and can enter the right start winning opening 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening and closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the game ball into the right start winning opening 28a. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically does not extremely inhibit the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28a when opened). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a) at the time of the opening operation, and the entering ball is randomly generated.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is the case where the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the non-winning condition), and the predetermined first condition (“9 round symbol 1”) 1st to 6th rounds, 8th round or 9th round condition when winning by "9 round symbol 2" or "9 round symbol 3", 1 when winning by "16 round symbol" Operates when the conditions from round 6 to round 6 or round 8 to round 16) are satisfied, enabling winning to the first big winning opening (no reference numeral) (special electric role Object, first special prize event occurrence means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device disposed on the lower right side of the effect unit 40 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening and closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state along the board, and at this time, winning at the first large winning opening is always disabled (the first large winning opening is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 is actuated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge, and the first big winning opening is opened (opened state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of gaming balls is not disabled, and an event of winning on the first large winning opening can be generated. At this time, the opening and closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the first big winning opening.

  Similarly to the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31 is when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit), and the second predetermined condition ("" Operates when the condition that it is the 7th round when winning by 9 round symbol 1 "," 9 round symbol 2 "," 9 round symbol 3 "or" 16 round symbol "is satisfied, the 2nd large Enables winning in a winning opening (specific winning opening: no reference symbol) (special electric winning combination, second special winning event occurrence means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device disposed to the lower right of the rendering unit 40 (so-called right attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. Although the first variable winning device 30 described above adopts a device in which the opening and closing member 30a falls forward, the second variable winning device 31 is a device in which the opening and closing member 31a slides inside the board. Adopted (slide-type attacker). The open / close member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening and closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of projecting to the player side from the board, and at this time the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 31a. Is impossible (the second big winning opening is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening and closing member 31a is drawn into the inside of the board, and the second large winning opening is opened (opened state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of gaming balls is not disabled, and an event of entering the second large winning opening can be generated.

[Probable area (specific area)]
In addition, inside the second variable winning device 31, a probability variation area (without the reference numeral) is provided separately from the second big winning opening. The probability change area is an area where the game ball can not pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and is an area where the game ball can pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. In addition, a slide member for random change area 330 (see FIG. 6) for guiding the gaming ball to the positive change area is disposed above the positive change area, and a specific timing (“9 round symbol 2”, “9 The game ball can be led to the probability variation region by operating the sliding member 330 for the probability variation region in the seventh round when winning in the round symbol 3 and the seventh round when winning in the "16 round symbol". .

[Winning device unit]
In the lower right portion of the game board unit 8, a winning device unit 300 is disposed. The winning device unit 300 includes the second variable winning device 31 described above. The winning device unit 300 is formed with a special passage (see arrow B in FIG. 3) through which all gaming balls that did not enter the variable start winning device 28 in operation among the right-handed gaming balls pass. ing. And, since the opening and closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31 is disposed on the special passage, when the opening and closing member 31a slides and the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, the special passage ( All gaming balls passing through arrow B) in FIG. 3 enter the second variable winning device 31. The details of the winning device unit 300 will be described later.

  The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from the central position to the right side part. In addition to the upper edge 40a of the effect unit 40 functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, the effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative components 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shaping, and can perform an effect operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like) . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . As described above, the gaming board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board and the decorativeness of the rendering unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitter) disposed not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid or the like) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a heart-shaped decoration). In addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter, the movable object 40 f for effect can execute the effect accompanied by the operation of the tangible object. The effect using the movable body 40 f can exert an appeal different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

  Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when the game balls flowing down the game area 8a randomly flow into the ball guide passage 40d, they pass through the inside and roll. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and here, the gaming ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game balls rolled on the rolling stage 40 e eventually flow down into the lower game area 8 a. A ball release passage 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the gaming balls guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release passage 40k easily flow into the middle start winning opening 26 located immediately below it. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls which did not enter (winning) various prize ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, including the game balls entered into the normal winning opening 22, 24 and the medium starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, it is driven into the game area 8a All the played balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through the out passage assembly (not shown) to the outside of the frame, and join the supply path of the island equipment (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the second variable winning device 31 and the periphery thereof as viewed from the upper left on the front side. In the following drawings, the shape of the obstacle nail is illustrated as a cylindrical shape, but the actual obstacle nail is thinner than the flat hemispherical head and the head connected to the head It is comprised by the column-shaped trunk | drum (shaft part).

The start gate 20 is disposed near the center of the second game area (right-handed area), and the variable start winning device 28 is disposed below the start gate 20. As described above, when the variable start winning device 28 operates, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged to the right to open the right start winning opening 28a.
In addition, below the variable start winning device 28, a winning device unit 300 including the second variable winning device 31 is disposed.

  The winning device unit 300 includes a front cover 310, a flow path forming member 320, a second variable winning device 31, a second count switch 85, a sliding member 330 for a positive change area, a positive change area switch not shown, and the like.

  The front cover 310 is made of a transparent resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the inside of the front cover 310 while being installed in the gaming board unit 8. In addition, the front cover 310 is provided with various decorations on the surface according to the presentation mode of the gaming machine. Further, a part of the front cover 310 on the back side is fixedly attached to the flow path forming member 320.

The flow path forming member 320 is a member that protrudes to the front of the gaming board unit 8, and the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface thereof.
In the flow path forming member 320, a receiving surface 321 is formed on the most upstream side. The receiving surface 321 is a surface for receiving the game ball dropped from above, and a curved surface 322 extending downward from the receiving surface 321 is formed below the receiving surface 321.
The first inclined surface 323 is formed at the end of the curved surface 322, and the second inclined surface 324 is formed with the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31 interposed therebetween. .

  The second variable winning device 31 is a special electric symbol (a so-called sliding V-attacker) having a definite variation area inside. The rear end portion of the opening / closing member 31 a of the second variable winning device 31 enters the opening 31 c, and the front end portion is located between the first inclined surface 323 and the second inclined surface 324. As described above, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). The opening and closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of projecting to the player side from the board, and at this time, the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 31a. Entry is impossible (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening and closing member 31a is drawn into the opening 31c, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (opened state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of gaming balls is not disabled, and an event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated. In addition, all the game balls which did not enter the variable start winning device 28 in operation among the right-handed game balls that have a path (route) including at least the first inclined surface 323 and the second inclined surface 324 The opening and closing member 31 a of the second variable winning device 31 may be disposed on the special passage.

  Here, the opening width of the second big winning opening 31b is a width shown by an arrow A in the figure when strictly grasped. That is, the opening width of the second large winning opening 31b is from the left end of the opening and closing member 31a (the second large winning opening 31b) to the left of the two obstacle nails disposed above the receiving surface 321. Up to. This is because all game balls that have passed through the area of arrow A in the figure enter the second large winning opening 31b as long as the second large winning opening 31b is open. However, the opening width of the second big winning opening 31b is not necessarily required to be strictly grasped like this. For example, from the left end of the opening and closing member 31a (second big winning opening 31b), the opening and closing member 31a (second big winning opening 31b) It can also be made to the right end of). In any case, in the present embodiment, an avoidance hole (a space for releasing a game ball) is not formed around the opening of the second big winning opening 31b.

  At the bottom of the second large winning opening 31b, there is formed a bottom surface 325 for guiding the gaming ball entered in the second large winning opening 31b downward. Under the bottom surface 325, a second count switch 85 is disposed. It is done. The second count switch 85 is for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

  A downward extending vertical passage 326 is formed downstream of the second count switch 85, and a movable space 327 of a tongue-shaped (vero-type) sliding member 330 for positive change region is provided at the lower end of the vertical passage 326. It is done. In the state shown in the figure, the slide member 330 for a probability change area is at a position (a retreat position) retracted to the back from the board surface, and the game ball can not pass through the probability change area. On the other hand, when the sliding member for probability change area 330 moves to a position (drive position) where the sliding member 330 for positive change protrudes to the front side from the disc surface, the slide member 330 for positive change region enters the movable space 327 and receives the game ball flowing down from above The gaming ball is guided to a not-shown probable variable area disposed inside.

  The slide member 330 for the probability change area is a thin plate-like member inclined from the front end to the rear end in order to guide the game ball to the back side, and the game ball is dropped downward at the rear end. A hole is formed. Then, when the gaming ball is guided to the inside by the sliding member for probability changing region 330, the gaming ball falls toward the probability changing region and then passes through the probability changing region. When the gaming ball passes through the probability variation area, it is detected by the probability variation area switch (not shown) that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation area. The game balls having passed through the probability change area are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, when providing a discharge switch in the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus 31, a probability change area | region switch can be made to serve as a discharge switch.

  A discharge passage 328 extending leftward in the drawing is formed downstream of the movable space 327, and a discharge hole 329 is disposed beyond the discharge passage 328. The game balls dropped to the discharge holes 329 are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. A discharge switch (not shown) can be disposed at the end of the discharge hole 329. And when the discharge switch is provided in the second variable winning device 31, by using such discharge switch and the above-mentioned count switch, it is judged whether the number of ball entry and the number of discharge match. Can.

  Of the two ordinary winning openings 24 arranged in the second gaming area (right-handed area) of the gaming area 8a, the upper ordinary winning opening 24 is disposed between the obstacle nails, and A game ball can be made to enter from the middle. On the other hand, the lower normal winning opening 24 is disposed on the lower left side of the winning device unit 300, and can play the game ball through the opening (no reference numeral) formed in the winning device unit 300. .

  FIG. 5 is a diagram showing that the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 in the open state and the game ball does not pass through the probability change area. In the following drawings, the front cover 310 disposed at the front of the winning apparatus unit 300, the internal structure of the winning apparatus unit 300, the normal winning opening 24 and the like are appropriately omitted.

  When a jackpot state occurs and the second variable winning device 31 consumes a round game, the player executes a right hit to advance the jackpot game. When the player performs a right strike, the gaming ball flows down along the right side of the gaming area, and contacts the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 first. Depending on the course of the game ball, the curved surface 322 or the first inclined surface 323 may be contacted without contacting the receiving surface 321 (the same applies hereinafter).

  Since the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 is inclined in the lower left direction, the gaming ball rolls in the lower left direction. The gaming ball released from the receiving surface 321 passes through the curved surface 322 and enters the first inclined surface 323. Since the first inclined surface 323 is also inclined in the lower left direction, the gaming ball travels toward the second variable winning device 31.

  When the second variable winning device 31 is open, the opening and closing member 31a slides and the second large winning opening 31b is in the open state, so that the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 31b. It becomes. When the gaming ball enters the second large winning opening 31b in this state, the gaming ball falls on the bottom surface 325 of the second large winning opening 31b. The gaming ball dropped to the bottom surface 325 rolls in the lower left direction and drops downward from the left end of the bottom surface 325. The second counting switch 85 detects the passage of the gaming ball dropped downward.

When it is the seventh round when winning in "9 round symbol 1", the slide member 330 for a probability change area is at a position (retracted position) drawn backward from the board surface, and guides the gaming ball to the inside of the probability change area There is nothing to do.
For this reason, the gaming ball is not guided by the sliding member for definite variation area 330, passes through the vertical passage 326, advances to the discharge passage 328, and falls into the discharge hole 329.

  FIG. 6 is a view showing the game ball entering the open second variable winning device 31 and the game ball passing through the probability change area.

  When a jackpot state occurs and the second variable winning device 31 consumes a round game, the player executes a right hit to advance the jackpot game. When the player performs a right strike, the gaming ball flows down along the right side of the gaming area, and contacts the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 first.

  Since the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 is inclined in the lower left direction, the gaming ball rolls in the lower left direction. The gaming ball released from the receiving surface 321 passes through the curved surface 322 and enters the first inclined surface 323. Since the first inclined surface 323 is also inclined in the lower left direction, the gaming ball travels toward the second variable winning device 31.

  When the second variable winning device 31 is open, the opening and closing member 31a slides and the second large winning opening 31b is in the open state, so that the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 31b. It becomes. When the gaming ball enters the second large winning opening 31b in this state, the gaming ball falls on the bottom surface 325 of the second large winning opening 31b. The gaming ball dropped to the bottom surface 325 rolls in the lower left direction and drops downward from the left end of the bottom surface 325. The second counting switch 85 detects the passage of the gaming ball dropped downward.

If it is the seventh round when winning with "9 round symbol 2" and "9 round symbol 3", or the seventh round when winning with "16 round symbol", the sliding member 330 for probability change area is from the board It is in a position (drive position) projecting to the front side, and guides the gaming ball to the internal probability variation area.
For this reason, the gaming ball is guided by the sliding member 330 for the probability variation area, thereby entering the inside of the board, and it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation region by the probability changing region switch (not shown).

  FIG. 7 is a view showing the game ball passing through the upper part of the second variable winning device 31 during closing.

  When a jackpot state occurs and the second variable winning device 31 consumes a round game, the player executes a right hit to advance the jackpot game. When the player performs a right strike, the gaming ball flows down along the right side of the gaming area, and contacts the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 first.

  Since the receiving surface 321 of the flow path forming member 320 is inclined in the lower left direction, the gaming ball rolls in the lower left direction. The gaming ball released from the receiving surface 321 passes through the curved surface 322 and enters the first inclined surface 323. Since the first inclined surface 323 is also inclined in the lower left direction, the gaming ball travels toward the second variable winning device 31.

  When the second variable winning device 31 is closed, the opening and closing member 31a does not slide inside the board, so the second large winning opening 31b is closed and the second large winning opening 31b is allowed to enter the game ball. I can not do it. When the gaming ball reaches the opening and closing member 31 a in this state, the gaming ball passes over the opening and closing member 31 a and proceeds to the second inclined surface 324. Then, the game ball passes the second inclined surface 324 and is released into the game area, and eventually enters the normal winning opening 24 or enters the first variable winning device 30 in the open state, It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out slot 32.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, all the games other than the game balls collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 by entering the variable start winning device 28 in operation among the right-handed game balls. Since the second variable winning device 31 is disposed at the position where the ball passes, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, all the game balls that have passed through the side of the variable start winning device 28 2) The variable winning device 31 will enter the ball. For this reason, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, generation of wasted balls is prevented, and the player is given a sense of superiority while suppressing a reduction in the player's sense of expectation. be able to.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, all the game balls other than the game balls collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 are entered into the second variable winning device 31 To avoid the formation of an escape hole (a space for escaping game balls) upstream of the second variable winning device 31 or to form a guideway for guiding the game balls entering the escape hole to the out port. There is no need to do it, and it is possible to secure a large game area.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 31 (the second large winning opening 31b) is formed at the outer edge of the area where the game ball can enter. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 31 can be moved to the outside of the game area. Then, by moving the second variable winning device 31 to the outside of the game area, the game area can be widely secured by that amount.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, on the upstream side or the right side of the second variable winning device 31, an avoidance hole for preventing the game ball from entering the second variable winning device 31 is not formed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, unless the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in the process of flowing down the right hitting area, the game ball is always directed to the second variable winning device 31, and the second If the variable winning device 31 is in the open state, the gaming ball will surely enter the second large winning opening 31b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state, generation of wasted balls is prevented, and it is possible to suppress reduction in the player's sense of expectation. Moreover, in the present embodiment, since the avoidance hole is not formed, the space can be used for another application (arrangement space of the decoration member, etc.).

  Moreover, according to the present embodiment, since the slide type opening and closing member 31a is adopted, the game ball is less likely to be spilled compared to an attacker of the type in which the opening and closing member falls forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge. Also, it is possible to show the player the game ball entering the winning opening carefully. And in this embodiment, since the slide type opening / closing member 31a is adopted, a situation advantageous to the player is likely to occur, and the player has a synergetic effect with the configuration of the second variable winning device 31 described above. It is possible to suppress the decline in the sense of expectation of

  FIG. 8 is a front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (a lower left position in the window 4a) in an enlarged manner. That is, in addition to the normal symbol display device 33 and the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a being provided, for example, at the lower left position in the window 4a, the game board unit 8 also has a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And the game state display device 38 is provided. Among them, the normal symbol display device 33 turns on, for example, two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display an ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops the normal symbol by turning on or off the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 stored numbers, for example, by a combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which one same lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. It is in the condition of displaying pieces. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of stored memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  Each time the game ball passes through the above-mentioned start gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in order to store the occurrence of the passage serving as the trigger of the operation lottery each time After passing (up to a maximum of 4), the symbol changes to a display mode after being reduced one by one every time fluctuation of the symbol is started. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in the normal symbol changeable start state (during stop display) However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memory number (up to four) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passes where fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

  Also, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display the variation state and the stop state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  In addition, each of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is, for example, 0 to 4 according to a display mode configured by combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs) respectively. The number of stored data is displayed (stored number display means). For example, in the display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which one same lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. It is in the condition of displaying pieces.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display after increase by one in the sense that the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 every time the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to the form (up to 4 at maximum), and changes to the display mode after decreasing one by one every time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entering of the ball. In addition, every time the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. It changes to the display mode of (up to 4 at maximum), and changes to the display mode after decreasing one by one every time the variation of the special symbol is triggered by the entering of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the first special symbol is already in a state where fluctuation can be started (during stop display). The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the game room. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in the state that the second special symbol can start changing already (during stop display) Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time It represents the number of times.

  In addition, the gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs respectively corresponding to the jackpot classification indicator lamps 38a and 38b, the probability fluctuation status indicator lamp 38d, the time reduction indicator lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display substrate 89.

[Configuration on control]
Next, the configuration regarding control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control unit 70 (main control computer) which is central to control operation, and the main control unit 70 mainly has a function to control the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 There is. Main controller 70 is incorporated in main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 which is a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 controls the ROM 74, RAM (CPU core and registers not shown). The semiconductor memory such as RWM 76 is integrated as an LSI. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among them, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here Are input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with an input / output (I / O) port 79 and a peripheral IC such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc. These circuits together with the main control CPU 72 It is mounted on a board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or in the inner layer portion).

  A gate switch 78 for detecting passage of the game ball is integrally provided in the above-mentioned start gate 20. In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the medium start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, and the middle start winning opening switch 80 and the right start winning opening. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. The respective start winning opening switches 80, 82 are for detecting entry of gaming balls into the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). In addition, the first count switch 84 is for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the probability variation area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means). Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the normal winning openings 22 and 24. In addition, although the structure which uses the common winning opening switch 86 about all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is mentioned as an example here, for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed in the right and left of a board, and the winning opening switch on the left side. In 86 as detecting the entry of the game ball to the normal winning opening 22 located on the left side of the board, and detecting the entering of the game ball to the normal winning opening 24 located on the right of the board with the right winning opening switch 86 It is also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, the winning detection signal from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the probability changing area switch 95 is a panel relay terminal board The signal is transmitted via 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game described above The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a in accordance with the progress of the game to control the lighting state of each LED. Further, the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display substrate 89 as described above, and this integrated The control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the upstream of the probability variation area, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second big winning opening solenoid 97, and a solenoid 99 for a probability change area are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excitation) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively ( Operation) or move the sliding member 330 for positive change region. The control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87 to the solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 as well.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4 described above, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7 described above. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, the contact signal from the glass frame open switch 91 is input to the main control unit 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame assembly 2 The contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 or the plastic frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (a payout control computer) controls the operation of the above-described payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control substrate) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as the ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated with a CPU core not shown. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the winning ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of gaming balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In the winning ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, the payout device substrate 100 is disposed together with the payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor), and a drive circuit of the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device substrate 100. There is. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of gaming balls from the winning ball case. Let out. The game balls paid out are sent to the above-described saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, the payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the winning ball case, and the payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102. Whenever the winning balls are actually paid out by the driving of the payout motor 102, the counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is inputted to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when the ball breakage occurs at the upstream position of the winning ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball breakage switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball condition based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, the full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6 c (the position of the bowl when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full with game balls, the game balls paid out more are It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Furthermore, when the lower plate 6c becomes full with gaming balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends the further prize ball operation even when the prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the number of unpaid prize balls remaining in the RAM 98. The memory of RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the unpaid prize ball remaining number information will not be lost .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch control board 108 and a launch solenoid 110 are installed. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the above-described launch control board set 174. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of delivering the gaming balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the firing solenoid 110 strikes the game ball sent to the shooting position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) shooting one game ball toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal that is proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launch handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

  A discharge relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the above-described tray unit 6, and signals from the discharge lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the release stop switch 116 are transmitted via the discharge relay terminal plate 118 to the release control board 108. Sent to Also, the drive signal from the emission control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the emission relay terminal plate 118. When the player manipulates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of manipulation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength to launch the game ball is adjusted in accordance with the amount of operation of the player. When the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or the emission stop signal is input from the emission stop switch 116, the drive circuit of the emission control board 108 stops the drive of the emission solenoid 110. Do. In addition, when the game device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game device connection terminal plate 120, the same release occurs. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops the drive of the firing solenoid 110.

  Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending and return switch board 123. Among these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the above-described frequency display unit. In addition, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending and return switch substrate 123, and when the sphere lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is borrowed. And, it is transmitted from the return switch substrate 123 to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal, and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, when the value medium is not inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the input value medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium You can also display a message prompting you to

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the presentation control apparatus 124 (computer for presentation control) as a structure on control. The effect control device 124 controls effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The presentation control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub control board) on which the presentation control CPU 126 which is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 incorporates a semiconductor core such as the ROM 128 or the RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134 in addition to an input / output driver and various peripheral ICs (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the effect command sent from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or processing for actually outputting sound effects, sounds, etc. from the speakers 54, 55, 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 described above are mutually connected via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O) Serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of

  The lamp drive circuit 132 includes, for example, switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or switches duty for driving voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs). ) And manage the operations such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the receiving lamp 52, the various lamps include a panel lamp 53 for decoration and effect installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 is equivalent to an LED incorporated in the above-mentioned effect unit or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. In addition, although the example which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination decoration board 136 is mentioned here, the saucer illumination decoration board | substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and about the saucer lamp 52 It may be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132.

  The sound drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator incorporating a sound ROM, a sound control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown). The sound drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to output sound. .

  In the present embodiment, the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136. To 52 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56. In addition, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136. It is input. Further, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is inputted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame electric decoration board | substrate 136 here is mentioned, when installing said receiving tray electric decoration board, the production switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are receiving plate electric decoration It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel electric decoration board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and in addition to the board surface lamp 53, a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel electric decoration board 138. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the above-described movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138.

  The liquid crystal display 42 described above is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen can be viewed through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Furthermore, the effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control substrate) on which a VDP 152 which is a display processor is mounted. Among them, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as the ROM 148 and the RAM 150 are integrated with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as the image ROM 154 and the VRAM 156 are integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control in accordance with the program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using the various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and also the control of the effect by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42 . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to effects to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that has received the information specifically generates an effect image based on the basic information. Control to display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. The VDP 152 having received this accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Furthermore, the VDP 152 develops image data in the frame buffer every frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 Drive separately.

  In addition, on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided. The power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit and can generate necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V or the like) from the outside power (for example, AC24V or the like) taken from the island facility through the power cord 164. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control unit 70, the payout control unit 92, the effect control unit 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the firing control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is also supplied to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. The low voltage power (for example, DC + 5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) incorporated in each device. Also, as described above, the power control unit 164 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal board 160 described above is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control unit 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but the configuration may be such that the external information signal is output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 as it is.

  The above is the configuration example regarding control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the gaming state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information stored at the time of the previous power shutoff or clearing the backup information conversely. It is a process for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

  10 and 11 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector system interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST system interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (but the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the specified interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes here a reset waiting process. This processing is for securing a certain standby time (for example, several thousands of ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power on) and checking the main power failure detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, it checks the bit of the input port of the main power failure detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power failure detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power failure detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 resumes the processing from the beginning. As a result, for example, it is possible to achieve system protection when the operations of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) are repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect set value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

  Step S105: Further, the main control CPU 72 initializes the mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, the value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch previously saved, and confirms whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally ended in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area (user work area including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the thumb check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H").
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command which was awaiting transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power-off.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes effect control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model specification command, a special symbol probability state specification command, a special drawing destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number A reduction effect command, a count cut counter remaining number command, a special game state specification command, etc. are transmitted. In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display pattern of the effect pattern, the effect display mode of the operation memory number, the sound output content, various lamps) It is possible to restore the light emission state etc.).

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state recovery processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc. are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the PC register which has been backed up.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, its contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the winning balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initialization processing to initialize CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in CTC. Thus, when a CTC interrupt occurs next, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register which has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 11 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits the interruption, and then executes a power-off occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs a bit check on the input port of the main power failure detection signal to monitor the occurrence of the power failure (reduction of the drive voltage). When the power is shut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal motor combination solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97, the definite variation area solenoid 99, etc. The entire contents of the work area except the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits the access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if power supply interruption does not occur, the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 next. There is also a well-known programming example in which the CPU executes the processing at the time of occurrence of the power-off as the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variation pattern decision random number, etc.) excluding the big hit decision random number (hardware random number) and the hit decision random number (hardware random number) corresponding to ordinary symbols. Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 13), but in this process, the initial value of the loop counter (every value of the random number) Random numbers are not required to be changed). The initial value updating random number is used to change the initial value randomly, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S118 is the same process as another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 13), so that the process is repeated (conflict with this) ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (eg several ms). Since it is (for example, several microseconds), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot decision random number and the hit decision random number.

  Steps S121 and S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and performs other random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) regardless of the determination of the winning type (hit type) among the software random numbers. This processing is performed in the remaining time when the timer interruption occurs while the main loop is being executed and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management processing (FIG. 13). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power-off occurrence check processing]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart specifically showing an example of the procedure of the power failure occurrence check process described above.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for a power supply interruption occurrence check. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power failure detection signal is continuously output.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power failure detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power failure detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power failure detection switch is mounted, for example, on the main control device 70, and this main power failure detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is When the voltage drops below the reference voltage, the main power failure detection signal is output. The main power failure detection switch may be incorporated in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power failure detection signal is not output at the present time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this processing and returns to the reset start processing. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power failure detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above-mentioned check condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is checked whether the result is 0 or not. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point in time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 to check the main power failure detection switch input port again. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: As described above, the main control CPU 72 adds a test signal to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric role solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the terminal or command control signal.

Steps S138 and S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats until addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for the entire area (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” representing the access prohibition as the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits the access to the work area (including the unusable area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: The main control CPU 72 then enters a standby loop, and stops all other processing in preparation for interruption of the main power supply. After the occurrence of a main power failure, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) not shown, so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power failure. It is held without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is retained as storage in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. Further, the stored storage is restored as backup information at the time of power-off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start processing (FIG. 10).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt management processing every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each step will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (each pair of the accumulator A and the flag register F and the general purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. In the registers (A to L) after the values are saved, another value can be written in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes lottery random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and loops within a prescribed range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes initial value update random number update processing here as well. The contents of the process are the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes an input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and the probability change area switch 95, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right start winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86 Read the input status (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this processing, among the switch signals input in the previous input processing, determination of an event that occurred during the game based on the winning detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82 And perform further processing depending on the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later using another flowchart.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 is an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that is an opportunity (lottery opportunity) has occurred. In addition, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that one of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing in accordance with each occurrence event. The process executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right start winning opening switch 82 will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol game processing and normal symbol game processing during the interrupt management processing. These processes are for advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 specifically. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, the first special symbol display device 34 and the first 2 Control the variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35, or control the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. In addition, the details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores the random number (determination random number per normal symbol) acquired triggered by the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204), and in this normal symbol game processing The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is judged whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal motor combination solenoid 88 after the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33 and the stop display of the normal symbol is performed in the predetermined hit mode. It excites and operates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in the form of the offset after the fluctuation display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a prize ball payout process. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), an award ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 to determine the number of award balls. Output command

[Regarding the number of winning balls and the number of winning gaming balls]
The number of winning balls of the starting opening of the first special symbol and the number of winning balls of the starting opening of the second special symbol are respectively set to one or more specified numbers. Also, the number of winning balls may be made different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. Furthermore, based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time saving state), the lowest winning ball number is set You may Furthermore, the probability of winning special symbols, the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the big winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the condition is satisfied, a big hit may be set such that the number of winning game balls per one big hit is less than 1⁄4 of the maximum number of winning ball games.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the average number of winning balls (number of winning balls obtained) that can be obtained at the time of big hit differs depending on the type of big hit, for example, 650 balls for "9 round symbol 1" and 700 for "9 round symbol 2" The ball is 2000 balls in "16 round symbols" and 1090 balls in "9 round symbols 3".

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above external information signal (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game arcade through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” as the big hit information is outputted to the outside, so that the external electronic device connected to the pachinko machine 1 (data display Can provide a variety of jackpot information (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing and outputting the big hit information into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the type (winning type) of big hit from these combinations can be totaled / managed by a hall computer (not shown), or internally Recognize changes in probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate small hits (hits that the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a "big hit" even if not elected Can be calculated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example by the data display device (not shown) to count and display the number of big hit occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1 and recognize whether it is currently a big hit for each platform It is also possible to recognize whether or not the symbol variation time is currently being shortened for each table. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the output state (set of ON or OFF) of each of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5”.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability change function being activated, time shortening function being activated) And store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the gaming state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the special symbol gaming process (step S205) or the normal symbol gaming process (step S206) is port-outputted. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a variable display or stop display of a symbol, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc. is performed).

  Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port-outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal of the normal electric role product solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the solenoid 99 for probability variation area stored in the port output request buffer, Combines signals etc. and outputs them.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command to be sent to the effect control device 124 (command necessary for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an unsent command, the output target command Port out.

  Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by this CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the processing (game control program module) of step S205 to step S212 is executed as timer interrupt processing is given, but these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is finished, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the interrupt termination in the interrupt program counter, and terminates the CTC interrupt.

  Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the values of the saved registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (the program address designated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 13). Each step will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol storage update process. The contents of the specific processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory updating process. Also here, the contents of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first large winning opening count processing. In the first large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 per round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 b and executes the second large winning opening count processing. In the second large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. If the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current number of normal symbol operation memory numbers is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), and obtains the random number per normal symbol if the upper limit number is not reached. Do. Further, the main control CPU 72 normally increments the number of symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a detection signal is input from the probability change area switch 95 corresponding to the probability change area provided inside the second variable winning device 31. If the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes the process at the time of probability variation area passage. The main control CPU 72 executes processing to set the value (01H) of the probability fluctuation function activation flag as the gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 as the probability variation area passing processing (high probability state transition means, probability fluctuation function activation means ). The probability fluctuation function operation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game (see step S4650 in FIG. 30). Further, as processing at the time of probability variation region passage, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability variation region passage command. The probability variation area passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). Note that the main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation area passing process only within a specific valid time (for example, within the time when operating the probability variation area solenoid 99 during the big hit game). On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 12).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of groups) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section is a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol The random numbers can be stored in sets one by one. At this time, if the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13).

  Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of the random number value is performed by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the designation of the address is performed twice in one byte each in the high order and low order. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the same as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by specifying the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the value as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers in order from the random number counter area for fluctuation of the RAM 76 as random number values related to the fluctuation conditions of the first special symbol (acquisition of fluctuation pattern determination elements means). Similarly, acquisition of these random number values is performed by specifying the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the reach control random number and the variation pattern determination random number are respectively acquired from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are free sections in the area. To store in a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, the first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at the current stage, the random numbers are stored sequentially from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored sequentially from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (gaming state) is in the middle of a big hit. If the jackpot is not medium (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the subsequent steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of prefetching is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

  Step S37: If not being a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition effect determination process for the first special symbol. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging (so-called "pre-reading"). The specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special drawing destination determination effect command regarding the first special symbol. The upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". The lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), so here, for example, a 1-word-long command by combining the upper byte with the lower byte Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number increase effect command for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the leading value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command, the 1-word length is obtained by adding the number of working storages after increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte Generate a rendering command. At this time, for the lower byte, the second digit is set to “0” by default, which indicates that the value is “the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working storages”. That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the number of current working memories becomes "01H" as a result of increasing one from the last working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", the number of working memories at this time is "02H" to "02H" as a result of being increased by one each from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H" It shows that it became "04H". In addition, said leading value "BBH" is a value showing that this presentation command is the operation memory number command about the 1st special symbol.

  Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. In this process, the special drawing destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the effect memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124. Storage number notification means).

  The main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14) when the above procedure is completed or when the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operating memory number counter represents the number (group number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the second special symbol operation memory number (increment the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). As in the previous step S31 (FIG. 15), the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) controls the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a based on the value of the counter added here. It will be

  Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers regarding fluctuation conditions of the second special symbol in order from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are free sections in the area. To store in sets (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 15) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (gaming state) is in the middle of a big hit. And if it is other than a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the subsequent steps S46 and S47. On the other hand, if the player is in the middle of a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that no effect is produced by the pre-reading for the ball entering during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than during a big hit (Step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44 respectively, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging. The specific content of the process will be described later.

  Step S47: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, "B9H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command. The upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is obtained by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number increase effect command for the second special symbol. Here, an effect command of 1 word length obtained by adding, to the lower byte, the operation storage number (for example, “01H” to “04H”) after the increase with respect to the leading value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper byte indicating the type of command Generate Similarly for the second special symbol, by defaulting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to represent that the value is "the result (change information) due to an increase in the number of working memories". it can. In addition, precedence value "BCH" is a value showing that the present production command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output setting processing for the second special symbol. In this manner, preparation is made to transmit the special drawing destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, etc. to the effect control device 124 regarding the second special symbol (stored number notification means) . Further, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 14).

[Determination process at acquisition]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the first first special symbol storage update process and the second special symbol storage update process (step S37 in FIG. 15, step S46 in FIG. 16) Execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle starting winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable starting winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to processing relating to the first special symbol and to processing relating to the second special symbol. The contents of the process will be described below along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte portion (for example, "00H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command (destination determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of disconnection).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot decision random number as the first judgment random number value. The random numbers to be loaded here are stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random value from the comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines, for example, from the value of the flag register whether the operation result is 0 or a positive value. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-time variation pattern information predetermination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly at the time of operation of the “time shortening function” is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. For example, if the current state is at the time of operation of "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to "outgoing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)" based on the reach determination random number loaded. Determine if there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "a loss reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "time reduction". In the case of reach variation, "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from reach mode random numbers, and a variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "outreach reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "time reduction". Alternatively, if the current state is the non-operation time (low probability state) of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out of reach reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number It is determined whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the “normal shift reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “normal shift reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normal deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit as in the case of the above-described process at the time of the removal.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the determination result management process of step S 82 and then ends the acquisition effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and the first special symbol storage update process of the caller (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol It returns to the memory update process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S54 that the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although no change has been started yet. Specifically, when there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, the big hit symbol random number to be paired with this "second large winning opening long open symbol (9 round symbol 2, 9 round symbol For example, “A0H” is set to the probability state schedule flag if it corresponds to “3, 16 round symbol)”. This value represents a flag value to be set to be in a high probability state in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit decision random number acquired after the big hit decision random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, and the big hit symbol random number to be paired with this corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value to be set to be in a normal (low) probability state in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit decision random number acquired later than the big hit decision random number. The flag value is reset (00H) if the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far. Also, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored, for example, in the flag area of the RAM 76. Here, an example in which the "predicted state of probability state flag" is used to strictly determine the prior collision determination is given. However, in the case of simply performing the previous state of collision determination based on the current probability state, step S56 and subsequent steps Step S58, Step S60, Step S62, Step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66 next.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the low probability (normal) comparison value in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance in accordance with the winning probability at low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the "current probability state flag". The probability state flag indicates whether the current internal state is a high probability (during a definite change) or not, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (during a definite change), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the probability is low (normally medium), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H” ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded special symbol probability state flag does not represent high probability (≠ 01 H), and as a result, if it indicates high probability (No ), And then execute step S64.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a high probability comparison value. As a result, the low probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability time comparison value is defined in advance in accordance with the winning probability at high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, in the case where the probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability, and the next step S72 is performed. Will do. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the present probability state flag does not represent the high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the hit value (lottery result destination determining means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines whether the operation result is a negative value (<0) or not from the value of the flag register, and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes The main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned disconnection time change pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the range of hit values but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes jackpot symbol type determination processing. This process is for determining the type of big hit (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number which is paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as step S54 described above, and from the result, the "second big winning opening short open symbol (9 round symbol 1)" or the "second large winning opening long open" as a big hit type It is determined which of the symbols (9 round symbols 2, 9 round symbols 3, 16 round symbols) corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as the special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol tip determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents the "second large winning opening short open symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents the “second large winning opening long opening symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state scheduled flag. As a result, in the processing after the next time, it is determined in step S56 that "flag is set".

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special drawing destination determination effect command. The special symbol destination determination value is set, for example, "01H" when it corresponds to "the second big winning opening short open symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to the "second big winning opening long open symbol" Be done. In any case, by setting the lower byte data, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of big hit. For example, prior determination information on the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before (previous internal hit) the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, in the case where the prior collision determination is performed only on the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

  Step S56: If the main control CPU 72 confirms that the probability state schedule flag has already been set (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the low probability (normal) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a "probability state scheduled flag". The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in advance in the subsequent judgment based on the preceding judgment result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding judgment result is to shift to high probability (probability), as described above, “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the immediately preceding judgment result If the probability state based on is going to return to low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule (≠ 01 H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed to set a high probability comparison value.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is already set and the value is scheduled to have a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and the subsequent step S72 or later is performed. Will do. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent the schedule of the high probability but represents the schedule of the normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the step The step S64 is skipped and the subsequent steps S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the big hit judgment in advance, taking into consideration the subsequent change of the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol storage update process (FIG. 16).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. Special symbol game processing is execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit variable winning prize device The configuration includes a subroutine (program module) group of the management process (step S5000) and the small hitting variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be performed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process to select as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the processing has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the address of the jump destination is specified in the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, the “process flag”, the “process selection flag”, etc. are used separately from such a selection method. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU chooses what to do next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each processing as it goes through and makes conditional branching (continuation / return) with reference to the flags one by one at its first step. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: During special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, a drive signal (1 byte data) of ON or OFF is output to each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, although the drive signal of ON or OFF is output with respect to each segment and dot of 7 segment LED, the pattern of a drive signal is constant and, thereby, stop display of a special symbol is performed.

  Step S5000: The big hit variable winning prize device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, an opportunity to shift to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) from the normal state up to that point occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the big hit variable winning device management processing in the previous execution selection processing (step S1000), the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 operates continuously for a predetermined time (for example, until 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or until 9 game balls are counted). Excitation is performed for a number of times (for example, eight times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric symbol). In addition, after the operation of the first variable winning device 30, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is set in advance for a certain period of time (for example, until 29 seconds of passing or counting the number of entering five game balls). It is excited for the number of times of operation (for example, once), and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of a special electric symbol). Furthermore, if it corresponds to the 16 round big hit, after the operation of the second variable winning device 31, until the first big winning opening solenoid 90 counts for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 9 balls entered) And the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of a special electric symbol). During this time, the game balls are concentrated on the first variable prize device 30 and the second variable prize device 31 intensively, whereby the player is given the opportunity to obtain many prize balls collectively (special game (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit is referred to as "round", and when the number of continuous operations is 16 times in total, they are referred to as "16 round". It may be called generically. In the present embodiment, the first to sixth rounds open and close the first variable winning device 30, the seventh round opens and closes the second variable winning device 31, and the eighth to sixteenth rounds. , Opening and closing the first variable winning device 30. Also, in the present embodiment, not only 16 rounds but also 9 rounds as jackpot types are provided, but for 16 rounds and 9 rounds, there are multiple winning types (win symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round. Alternatively, each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is ended, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The number-of-rounds command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (major) in that round.

  Then, when the big hit game is ended, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the end of the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operating flag, time shortening function operating flag) High probability time shortening state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific gaming state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, and as described above, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the open time of the variable start winning device 28 Is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). The “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be shifted to only one of them in control or may be shifted to both of them.

  Step S6000: The small hitting variable winning prize device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hitting mode in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit, an opportunity to shift to the small hit gaming state from the normal state until then occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most winnings to the first large winning opening occur do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, only the (1) “16 round big hit” is provided as the plurality of winning types, for example, for the “16 round big hit” described above. In addition to “16 round symbol big hit”, (2) “9 round big hit 1”, (3) “9 round big hit 2” and (4) “9 round symbol 3” are provided as a plurality of winning types . However, in the present embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds and 9 rounds may be provided.

  The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is displayed stopped when winning. For example, "16 round big hit" corresponds to the big hit of "16 round pattern", "9 round big hit 1" corresponds to the "9 round big pattern 1" big hit, "9 round big hit 2" is "9 round big hit 2 "9 round pattern 3" corresponds to the "9 round big hit 3" big hit. Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[The big winning opening opening operation concerning the winning design]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the special winning opening opening operation regarding the winning symbol. The contents will be described for the opening of the special winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol.

[9 round pattern 1]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift to the big hit gaming state from the normal state till then occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, opening of the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is performed once each for a sufficiently long time (for example, maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this is five rounds. Continue to the eyes. Then, in the sixth round, the first big winning opening is opened four times in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in comparison with the first round to the fifth round. Therefore, the sixth round of the "9th round symbol 1" jackpot game is ended without providing the player with substantial balls (prize balls). Further, in the seventh round, the second winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in comparison with the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the seventh round of the "9th round pattern 1" jackpot game is ended without providing the player with substantial balls (prize balls). Also, in the eighth and ninth rounds, the first winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened one by one in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in comparison with the first to fifth rounds. Do. Therefore, the eighth and ninth rounds of the "9th round pattern 1" jackpot game are ended without providing the player with substantial balls (prize balls). For this reason, the jackpot game of "9 round symbol 1" is to give the player the ball (prize ball) for about 5 rounds. When it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1", "time reduction function" is activated after the end of the big hit game even if "time reduction function" is in a non-operating state in the previous game, "time The player is given the benefit of transitioning to the shortened state. However, in the big hit game of “9 round symbol 1”, since the solenoid 99 for the probability variation area does not operate, the gaming ball does not pass the probability variation area. It should be noted that the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time, when a prescribed number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) have been generated in one round. Ru. Also, similarly, when a prescribed number of winnings (for example, 5 times = 5 game balls) occur in one round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. It is closed.

[9 round pattern 2]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbol 2”, an opportunity to shift to the big hit gaming state from the normal state until then occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, opening of the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is performed once each for a sufficiently long time (for example, maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this is five rounds. Continue to the eyes. Then, in the sixth round, the first big winning opening is opened four times in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in comparison with the first round to the fifth round. Therefore, the sixth round of the "9th round pattern 2" jackpot game ends without providing the player with substantial balls (prize balls). In addition, in the seventh round of the "9 round symbol 2" of the big hit game, it takes a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds through) of the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 Opening is done. Furthermore, in the eighth and ninth rounds, the first winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened one by one in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in comparison with the first to fifth rounds. Do. For this reason, the jackpot game of "9 round symbol 2" is to give the player a ball for six rounds (prize ball). However, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” big hit game, since the solenoid 99 for the probability change area is activated, there is a possibility that the game ball passes the probability change area.

  In addition, in the case where the game ball passes through the definite variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 in the seventh round, it is a case where it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”, “probability” after the end of the big hit game The variable function is activated to give the player the benefit of transitioning to the high probability state.

  Furthermore, when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 2", after the end of the big hit game even if the "time shortening function" is in the inactive state in the previous game regardless of the presence or absence of passage of the probability change area By activating the "time reduction function", the player is given a privilege to shift to the "time reduction state".

[16 round pattern]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, when the special symbol is stop displayed in the form of “16 round symbol”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, opening of the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is performed once each for a sufficiently long time (for example, maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this is six rounds. Continue to the eyes. Then, in the seventh round, a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds) is taken to open the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. Thereafter, the first variable winning device 30 of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the eighth round, and this is the 16th round Continue until For this reason, the big hit game of "16 round symbols" is to give the player the balls for 16 rounds. However, in the seventh round of the "16 round symbol" of the big hit game, since the solenoid 99 for the probability change area is activated, there is a possibility that the game ball passes the probability change area.

  In addition, in the case where the game ball passes through a definite change area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 in the seventh round, the probability change after the end of the big hit game, which corresponds to the “16 round symbol”. The function is activated to give the player the benefit of transitioning to the "high probability state".

  Furthermore, when it corresponds to the “16 round symbol”, regardless of the passage of the definite variation area, even after the “time shortening function” is in the inactive state in the previous game, after the end of the big hit game By activating the time saving function, the player is given a privilege to shift to the time saving state.

[9 round pattern 3]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbol 3”, an opportunity to shift to the big hit gaming state from the normal state till then occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, opening of the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is performed once each for a sufficiently long time (for example, maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this is six rounds. Continue to the eyes. Then, in the seventh round, a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds) is taken to open the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. Thereafter, the first variable winning device 30 of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the eighth round, and this is the ninth round. Continue until For this reason, the jackpot game of "9 round symbol" is to give the player the ball (prize ball) for about 9 rounds. However, in the seventh round of the "9 round pattern" of the big hit game, since the solenoid 99 for the probability change area is activated, there is a possibility that the game ball passes the probability change area.

  In addition, in the case where the game ball passes through the definite variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 in the seventh round, the probability is "probability" after the end of the big hit game, which corresponds to "9 round symbol 3". The variable function is activated to give the player the benefit of transitioning to the high probability state.

  Furthermore, when it corresponds to "9 round pattern", after the end of the big hit game even if the "time shortening function" is in the inactive state in the previous game regardless of the presence or absence of passage of the probability change area By activating the time saving function, the player is given a privilege to shift to the time saving state.

  In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to any of the above-mentioned "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" or "16 round symbol", and the gaming ball passes the definite variation area during the big hit game A bonus is given to the player to shift the internal state to the "high probability time shortening state" after the end of the big hit game. In addition, it won the internal lottery in "high probability time shortening state", and the winning design at that time falls under either "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" or "16 round symbol", and When the gaming ball passes the definite change area during the big hit game, the "high probability time reduction state" is continued (restarted) even after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, when the winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned "9 round symbol 1", the game ball does not pass through the probability change area during the big hit game, so the internal state shifts to "low probability time shortening state" after the big hit game ends. Do. In addition, even if the winning design corresponds to any of the above-mentioned "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" or "16 round symbol", if the game ball does not pass the probability variation area during the big hit game, After the jackpot game is over, the internal state shifts to the "low probability time state".

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode during the previous special symbol stop display processing, the small hit game in the normal probability state or the high probability state (the first variable winning device 30 is operated Game is executed (in the present embodiment, a small hit is not set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the winning of the first large winning opening hardly occurs. In addition, even when the small hit game is over, the "probability change function" does not operate, and the "time reduction function" does not operate. Therefore, to "high probability state" or "time reduction state" Transitional benefits are not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win the small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small hit game is finished, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small After the end of the hit game, "time saving state" never ends (except when the upper limit number is reached). In addition, in this embodiment, although it is set as the game specification which sets a small hit, it can also be set as the game specification which does not set a small hit.

[Special symbol change pretreatment]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is larger than 0). This confirmation can be performed with reference to the value of the operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. If the number of operation memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this processing, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demonstration effect. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above-described effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of recovery, the end address is recovered as described above (the same applies to the following).

  On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads one of the random numbers for lottery (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, whichever corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers from the top section, and moves the remaining random numbers to the previous section one by one (shift ). The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. Note that the program may be a program in which random numbers are read out in the order simply stored without providing such a priority order by special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one from the value of the operation memory number counter (one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been shifted the random number) stored in the RAM 76 and subtracts it. The later value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". Thereby, the display mode of the number of memories by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (1 decrease) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13). . When the procedure up to this point is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number is included in the range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the big hit value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (during probability fluctuation function operation), and in the high probability state, the range of the big hit value is expanded about 10 times than the normal probability state. Ru. Then, if the random number value read out at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  If the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination processing, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution) means). The "small hit" referred to here is something other than the non-election (loss), but is different from the "big hit". That is, although "big hit" generates an opportunity (governing point of the game) to shift to the above "high probability state" or "time shortening state", "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as a condition that operates the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (during probability fluctuation function operation). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and the process proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as a hit range other than the non-winning, according to the program. It is also possible to write each in the ROM 74, read it out, and make a big hit judgment while comparing it with a random number value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination processing. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, set 01H) or the small hit (for example, set 0AH) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing upon release. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of release by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of removal) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13).

  In addition, in this embodiment, since 7 segment LED is used for the 1st special symbol display 34 and the 2nd special symbol display 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment is always one segment (the center) It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H), leaving only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes out-of-time variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for a special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol or corresponds to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of departure differs depending on whether or not the above-mentioned "time reduction state", in this processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is "time reduction state". Check if there is. In the case of the "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of losing is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except for basically performing the reach fluctuation (a shortening time fluctuation determining means ). Moreover, even if it is not a "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of losing is set based on "the number of operation display memory at the time of fluctuation display start (0 to 3)" set at step S2200 except when the reach fluctuation is performed. The number may be shortened (for example, 0 at the start of variable display operation → about 12.5 seconds, 1 at the start of variable display operation → about 8 seconds, 2 at the start of variable display operation → 5 About 2 seconds, at the start of fluctuation display 3 working memory number → about 2.5 seconds). In addition, the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of removal) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery falls under the non-winning condition, for example, “reach effect” is generated on the effect and the control is performed without causing the “reach effect”. And Then, in the “time variation pattern selection table for losing”, a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect” is defined in advance, and when it corresponds to non-winning, One of the variation patterns is to be selected. In addition, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect and the like.

[Example of out-of-time variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of low probability non-time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" The "variation pattern number""1" to "8" are assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to the variation patterns that are out without reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are the variation patterns that become off after reaching It corresponds. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents in accordance with the number of operation start storages (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, in the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the length of the set variation time is significantly different. That is, while the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds according to the number of stored memories), the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to about 150 seconds) or more twice that time.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern specifying means) used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to not winning). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" It is provided, and the "variation pattern number" of "21" to "28" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out without reach effect, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are the fluctuation patterns that are out after reaching. It corresponds. However, since fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach fluctuation due to time shortening fluctuation, fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) shortened as fluctuation time of normal state is set .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern specifying means) used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to not winning). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" The "variation pattern number""41" to "48" are assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to the variation patterns that are out without reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are the variation patterns that become off after reaching. It corresponds. However, fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are extremely shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 0.5 seconds) as fluctuation time of normal state in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in high probability time shortened state Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "42" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

[See Figure 20: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are the control procedures when the big hit determination result is out (other than non-winning), but the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes) The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of the big hit will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes jackpot stop symbol determination processing (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (big hit stop symbol number) according to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is previously defined in the special symbol determination data table (winning type specifying means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol from the stored contents based on the big hit symbol random number.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, four types are roughly prepared as winning patterns to be determined selectively at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the four types is "9 round symbol 1", "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" and "16 round symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of four types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "9 round symbol 1", "9 round symbol 1a", "9 round symbol 1b", "9 round symbol 1c", and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 24: is a figure which shows the structure row | line of a 1st special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. If the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means) shown in FIG. 24 and selects the type of winning symbol. decide.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value according to the winning symbol, and each distribution value “50”, “50” is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. In the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, “16 round symbol”, and “9 round symbol 3” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio that "9 round symbol 1" is selected is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio that "9 round symbol 2" is selected is 100 minutes Of 50 (= 50%). In the first special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, distribution values for "16 round symbol" and "9 round symbol 3" are not set. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

  In any case, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table Select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described, for example, by a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is that the winning symbol of this time is selected at the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents Further, the lower byte EVENT values "01H" and "02H" respectively indicate the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "9 round symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H" It will be.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time savings]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time savings (limit number of times) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to either "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2", the number of time saving is given 100 times. However, if it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” and the gaming ball passes the definite variation area during the big hit game, the number of time saving is given 170 times.

[Second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration row of the second special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means) shown in FIG. 25 and selects the kind of winning symbol. decide.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, the distribution value according to the winning symbol is shown in the left column, and the distribution value “100” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "9 round symbol 1", "9 round symbol 2", "16 round symbol", and "9 round symbol 3" corresponding to the sorting value are shown. That is, at the time of big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio that "16 round symbol" is selected is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio that "9 round symbol 3" is selected is 100. 50 minutes (= 50%). In addition, the distribution value about "9 round symbol 1" and "9 round symbol 2" is not set to the 2nd special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table.

  If the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, as shown in the third column from the left in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above-mentioned MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol It represents that it is. In addition, the EVENT value “03H” of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and the "16 round symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time savings]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of times of time reduction (limit number of times) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "16 round symbols" and "9 round symbols 3", the number of time saving is given 100 times. However, if it corresponds to "16 round symbol", "9 round symbol 3" and the gaming ball passes through the probability change area during the big hit game, the number of time saving is given 170 times.

  In addition, it is based on the following reasons that the selection ratio of the winning symbol is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above. That is, since the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency as compared to the normal time (when the time shortening function is inactive) when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state” or the “low probability time shortening state”, The operation memory for the second special symbol is easier to be stored than the operation memory for the first special symbol. In this case, if the selection ratio of the “16 round symbol” is increased for the second special symbol, it becomes easier to win the “16 round symbol” than in the normal time, and the advantage of being able to increase the player's profit accordingly There is.

[See Figure 20: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than the time of departure is generally determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, for example, “reach effect” is generated on the effect to perform control to be a big hit. And in the "big hit variation pattern selection table", the variation pattern corresponding to multiple kinds of "reach effect" is specified, and when it corresponds to 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, any of them from among them The variation pattern will be selected. In addition, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect and the like. In addition, when winning with the time shortening function activated, even if a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern without reach effect) is selected without selecting a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low probability non-time shortening state (variation pattern specifying means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished between the 9 round big hit and the 16 round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" It is provided, and the "variation pattern number""61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The change pattern numbers “61” to “68” correspond to the change patterns that are the reach effect and hit.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low probability time shortening state (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" It is provided, and the "variation pattern number" of "81" to "88" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” correspond to the variation patterns that are the reach effect and hit.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the high probability time reduction state (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" The "variation pattern numbers""101" to "108" are assigned to the respective "comparison values".

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” correspond to the variation patterns that are the reach effect and hit. At the time of winning in the high probability time shortening state, it may be possible to set a fluctuation pattern which is a hit without performing the reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

[See Figure 20: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU72, the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 (big hit stop symbol number) is "9 round symbol 1", "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" or " If it is one of the 16 round symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time reduction function activation flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function activation means) .

  Further, in the process of step S 2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the small hit process will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit time stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type (small hit time stop symbol number) of the winning symbol at the small hit based on the big hit symbol random number. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the small hit is previously defined in the small hit special symbol selection table (win type specifying means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol for the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated dedicated random number may be used.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is only one kind of "twice open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, for example, other types such as “once-open small hit symbol” and “three-open small hit symbol” may be prepared. As mentioned above, the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not become a trigger for the state after it to change to the "high probability state" or the "time shortening state", so this type of pachinko machine is essential " A "one open small hit design" can be provided without being bound by the provision of two rounds (open twice) or more.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes small hitting variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, it is possible to select the reach fluctuation pattern in the case of a small hit, or to select a fluctuation pattern equal to the time of the out-of-normal fluctuation.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes small hit and other setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of failure / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 18: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In special symbol variation processing, as described above, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the variation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then the timer according to the passage of time (count number of clock pulses or value of interrupt counter) Decrement the counter value. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination processing (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 20). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. In the special symbol stop display processing, when the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time, the main control CPU 72 deletes the flag during flag variation.

[Special symbol storage area shift process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process described above. If the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100 in FIG. 20: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest one of the present operation memories corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the memory area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest operation memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 next The process advances to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest operation memory corresponds to the first special symbol (Step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the memory area. . The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the special symbol of the target designated in either step S2212 or step S2214 above. In addition, about the content of a specific process, it is as having already stated in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the special symbol of interest. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (−1) the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S 2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the change start operation memory number” from the value of the operation memory counter after subtraction. Here, the value of the operation memory counter may be added to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and then the “number of operation memories at start of fluctuation” may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the present memory area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of 1 word length, but the configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect memory number increase effect command". That is, the effect memory number reduction effect command has a lower byte value (for example, "00H" to "03H" for indicating the number of action memories after reduction with respect to the leading value (for example, "BCH") for the upper byte indicating the command type. “), And the value of the lower byte is obtained by further adding (ORing) an addition value (eg,“ 10H ”) which means“ a decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption ”. Therefore, for the low-order byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the addition value "10H", and this value indicates that "result (change information) due to decrease in the number of working memories" It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", the number of working memories "4" (command notation "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and the current working memory number is "3" (command The notation shows that it became "13H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", the result is that the working memory numbers "3" to "1" (command notation "13H" to "11H") until the previous time decrease by one respectively The present operating memory number indicates that "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). In addition, said leading value "BCH" is a value showing that this presentation command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the effect memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the leading value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that the preceding value is an operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the operation memory number reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 20).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of processing during special symbol stop display. Each step will be described below.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrement by the interrupt cycle).

  Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) also in the next interrupt cycle to repeatedly execute the special symbol stop display process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the flag during the symbol fluctuation here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. If the value (01H) of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the “big hit variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing to set various functions inoperative in this processing. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (overall role) is started, the low probability non-time shortening state is transitioned.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “big bonus start (big hit game in progress)” as an internal state flag in control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the big hit symbol. For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is "16 round symbol", the value corresponding to "16 round" is set in the continuous operation number status. Moreover, when the kind of big hit symbol is "9 round symbol 1", "9 round symbol 2" or "9 round symbol 3", the value showing "9 rounds" is set to continuous operation frequency status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a big hit. A state command representing a big hit is sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

  Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the big hit symbol determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is "16 round symbol", the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing "16 round". Also, when the type of jackpot symbol is "9 round symbol 1", "9 round symbol 2" or "9 round symbol 3", the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing "9 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case other than the big hit time, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the value (01H) of the big hit flag is not set in step S4300 (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether the small hit flag value (01H) is set or not. Then, if the small hit flag value (01H) is not set either and it is simply out of step (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, when the small hit flag value (01H) is set (Step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag on control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a small hit. A state command representing a small hit is sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the "counting counter", the respective counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time shortening state".

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the number cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the number cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements the count counter value (by one).
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 then determines whether the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of operation of the number cut function. In the present embodiment, when transitioning to the “high probability time shortening state”, the counting counter for the high probability state and the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), and thus is reset It is a probability variation function operation flag and a time shortening function operation flag. In addition, when transitioning to the “low probability time shortening state”, since the number cut counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), only the time shortening function activation flag is reset. is there. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended after the stop display of the special symbol. When the above procedure is completed, the processing returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process is a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a status display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), a continuous operation number display setting The configuration includes a subroutine group of the process (step S1240).

  Among them, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation storage display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second as described above. A drive signal to be applied to each of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a is generated And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time shortening state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function activation flag at power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. In addition, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps on lighting until the jackpot game regarding the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times, and then it is not The display is switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function activation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time saving status indicator 38e regardless of whether the power is turned on or not. Output Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big hit game or a small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38 f . Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function activation flag, the main control CPU72 in addition to the above-mentioned time saving status indicator lamp 38e, also the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f Output. It should be noted that the launch position specification lamp 38f lights up from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when shifting to the "time reduced state" after the big hit game, and is not lighted by the end of the "time reduced state" It becomes OFF).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, it is the display lamp 38a, 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status that is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "16 rounds (16R)". Also, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates "9 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "9 rounds (9R)".

[Big win variable pay device management process]
Next, details of the jackpot variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big hit variable winning prize device management process. The big hit variable winning device management process is a big hit game process selection processing (step S5100), a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), a big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300), a big hit large The subroutine group of the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the big hit end process (step S5500) is included.

  Step S5100: In the jackpot gaming process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the big hit variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in a situation where the operation (opening and closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening open pattern setting processing as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit opening big winning opening If the operation processing has been completed, then the jackpot winning prize closing operation (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big winning opening / closing operation process and the big hit big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs a big hit finish process (the next jump destination) Step S5500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit, and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes an opening pattern setting process by symbol. In this process, the main control CPU72 according to the corresponding winning symbol of this time opening pattern (number of opening per round, opening time of each round, interval time during round), interval time between rounds, one round Set the number of counts (maximum number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for positive change area. In addition, about the opening pattern according to the winning symbol, it is the opening operation of the big winning opening regarding the winning symbol described in the item of "plural winning types" in the special symbol gaming process (FIG. 18) earlier (FIG. 19) It is. In addition, 10 second is set, for example for the interval time in the round in 6 rounds and 7 rounds in which several times of opening are set in 1 round.

  In addition, the interval time between rounds is, for example, about 1 second to 2.5 seconds for any of "9 round symbols 1", "9 round symbols 2", "9 round symbols 3", or "16 round symbols" Shall be set to The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is, for example, 9 for entering (winning) the first special electric winning combination 30 (first large winning opening), and the second special electric winning combination 31 The number of winnings (winning) for (second winning opening) is, for example, five. In addition, in the sixth, eighth and ninth rounds for the 9 round symbols 1 and 2, there is almost no chance that a prize will occur during the opening of an extremely short time (about 0.1 second) (it is extremely difficult, though not impossible) ).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current big hit game based on the big hit winning symbol selected in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). Specifically, if “16 round symbols” in the large category is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. In addition, when “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “9 round symbol 3” are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to nine. The number of execution rounds set here is stored, for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76 as a corresponding value ("8" for 9 times, "15" for 16 times) in the program.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is an open time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is operated. In addition, if about 29.0 seconds are set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time for winning of the big winning opening to be easily generated during one opening (for example, the launch control board The time during which ten or more gaming balls are fired by the set 174 (preferably six seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time is hardly generated (it becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win the big winning opening during one opening. A time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably, a time shorter than a firing interval of the game balls by the launch control board set 174) is obtained.

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit time interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The big hit time interval timer includes an interval timer in a round and an interval timer between rounds. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time during the round or between rounds during the big hit.

  For example, in the 6th round when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1" and "9 round symbol 2", 10.0 seconds are set as a value of an interval timer in a round. Moreover, in the 7th round at the time of falling under "9 round symbol 2", 10.0 seconds and 15.0 seconds are set as a value of an interval timer in a round. Also, as the value of the interval timer between rounds, about 1 second to 2.5 seconds is basically set between all rounds regardless of the type of winning symbol.

  Step S5212: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit large winning opening / closing operation process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

[Big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big hit big winning opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer (interval timer in round or interval timer between rounds) is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating, it can be checked whether the interval timer is counting down.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it can not confirm that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first large winning opening solenoid 90 or the second large winning opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S5303: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variable area open process. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied is output to the probability change region solenoid 99. Thereby, the state where the slide member 330 for the probability change area can be moved to a position (drive position) where the slide member 330 for the definite change area protrudes to the front side from the board surface, and the gaming ball can be guided to the probability change area arranged inside the second big winning opening It becomes. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the release timer countdown set in the previous big hit, special winning opening open pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 33) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the open time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5308. Run.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening during opening or the second large winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9 or 5). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one round during a big hit) as described above. For example, an upper limit (upper limit of the number of winning balls) is set to 9 for the first large winning opening and to 5 for the second large winning opening. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing.

  When this process (step S5310) is ended and the big hit variable winning prize device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is currently set to the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process at the current stage, the main control CPU72 The procedures of steps S5301 to S5310 are repeatedly executed.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first large winning opening solenoid 90 or the second large winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variable area closing process. Specifically, when the process of applying the drive signal to the solenoid 99 for the probability change region is executed in the previous step S5303, the application is performed based on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not. Execute processing to stop the output of the drive signal. As a result, the slide member 330 for the probability change area is moved to a position (back position) where the slide member 330 for the definite change area is recessed behind the board surface, and the gaming ball can not be guided to the probability change area arranged inside the second big winning opening Become. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer (interval timer during round or interval timer between rounds) set in the above-mentioned big hit, large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 33).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time between rounds has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the interval timer (interval timer during round or interval timer between rounds) after the countdown process is 0 or less, and the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the end address of the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 32). When the big hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing becomes 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the release number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why "the number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, "make the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 open more than once in one round during a big hit" This is to cope with the open pattern of If the counter value has not reached the set number of times at the end of one opening, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit variable winning prize device management processing, and the jump destination is currently set to the big hit opening winning prize opening and closing operation process Since the above-mentioned steps S5301 to S5320 are repeatedly performed. As a result, incrementing of the release number counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning apparatus management process. Then, when the big hit variable winning prize device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit big winning hole closing process.

[Big winning opening opening process]
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special winning opening opening process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current number of rounds is the seventh round. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the round number counter described above, and confirms whether or not the value is a value corresponding to seven rounds. As a result of this confirmation, if the current number of rounds is the seventh round (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the current number of rounds is not the seventh round (No), that is, if it is one of 1 to 6 and 8 to 16 rounds, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

  Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the second big winning opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to be applied to the second large winning opening solenoid 97. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to be applied to the first large winning opening solenoid 90. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit big winning opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 34).

[Probable variation area open processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the probability variation area releasing process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current number of rounds is the seventh round. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the round number counter described above, and confirms whether or not the value is a value corresponding to seven rounds. As a result of the confirmation, if the current number of rounds is the seventh round (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5352. On the other hand, when the current number of rounds is not the seventh round (No), that is, when it is one of 1 to 6 and 8 to 16 rounds, the main control CPU72 is a big hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing (FIG. 34) Return to

  Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the type of the winning symbol is 9 round symbol 1. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning symbol at the time of the big hit selected in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20) is the nine round symbol 1. As a result of this confirmation, when the type of the winning symbol is 9 round symbol 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit big winning opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 34). On the other hand, if the type of winning symbol is not 9 round symbol 1 (No), that is, if it is 9 round symbol 2, 9 round symbol 3 or 16 round symbol, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5354 next.

  Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 opens the probability variation area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to be applied to the probability change region solenoid 99. Thereby, the state where the slide member 330 for the probability change area can be moved to a position (drive position) where the slide member 330 for the definite change area protrudes to the front side from the board surface, and the gaming ball can be guided to the probability change area arranged inside the second big winning opening It becomes.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit big winning opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 34).

[Probable variation area closing process]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the definite variable area closing process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probable variable area is currently open. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a drive signal to be applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output in the above-mentioned probability variation region opening process (FIG. 34: step S5303). As a result of the check, if the probable variation area is currently open (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5372. On the other hand, when the probable variation area is not currently open (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 34).

  Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the last opening of the second large winning opening has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the release number counter incremented in the previous processing (step S5318), and confirms whether the value to be incremented next corresponds to the number set in the current round Thus, it is confirmed whether or not the final opening of the second big winning opening has ended. As a result of this confirmation, when the last opening of the second large winning opening has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5374. On the other hand, when the last opening of the second big winning opening has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 34).

  Step S5374: The main control CPU 72 closes the probability variation area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability change region solenoid 99. As a result, the slide member 330 for the probability change area is moved to a position (back position) where the slide member 330 for the definite change area is recessed behind the board surface, and the gaming ball can not be guided to the probability change area arranged inside the second big winning opening Become.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit big winning opening / closing operation processing (FIG. 34).

[Big win time big prize mouth closing processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit big winning hole closing process. The big hit big winning hole closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the above round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes “1” at the stage when the first round is finished and the second round is started.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the round number counter after increment (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after one subtraction) (No) Then, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current value of the round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can check the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination as the big hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit variable winning prize device management process, the main control CPU 72 selects the next big jump time big win opening / closing operation process in the big hit time game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32). Run. Then, after execution of the big hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing, through the execution of the big hit large winning opening closing processing, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hitting large winning opening closing processing again, the above step S5402 to step S5408 Execute repeatedly. Thus, the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 times or 16 times).

  If the actual number of rounds has reached the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5410 next.

  Steps S5410 and S5412: In this case, when the round number counter is reset (= 0), the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination as the big hit end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning prize device management process, the big hit end process is selected this time.

[Big hit end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit end process. This big hit end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit is finished. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the big hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) as time passes.

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Steps S5503 and S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 14).

  Step S5508: If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: YES), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability variations (for example, 170 times). The value of the set number of probability fluctuations is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, and becomes the above-mentioned number cut counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times to perform fluctuation of the special symbol (internal lottery) in the high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit is set to the high probability state, the result of the winning may not be obtained in the high probability state, and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called truncation). If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the above-mentioned big hit time other special symbol fluctuation pre-processing and other setting process (step S 2414 in FIG. 20).

  Step S5512: If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is set (step S5510: YES), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of time shortening (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time shortening reduction number is to be set depends on the value of the probability variation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time shortening state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag must be set. For example, 100 times may be set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means). The value of the set number of time reductions is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of time reductions set here is the upper limit number of times to reduce the variation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: NO), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, in response to the resetting of the jackpot flag or the end of the winning combination, a state designation command representing "normally medium" is generated as the gaming state. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state specification command representing "in high probability" is generated as the internal state, and if the time shortening function activation flag is set, the "time reduction in internal state" is generated. Generate a state specification command representing "." These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit opening winning pattern opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing.

[Small hit variable pay device management process]
Next, the details of the small hit variable winning prize device management process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the small hitting variable winning prize device management process. Small hit time variable winning device management process, small hit time game process selection process (step S6100), small hit time large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation process (step S6300) The small winning large winning opening closing process (step S6400), the small hitting time ending process (step S6500) is a configuration including a subroutine group.

  Step S6100: In the small hitting game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. Do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 as the next jump destination small winning large winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S6300) is selected, small hit large If the winning opening opening / closing operation processing is completed, the small hit large winning opening closing processing (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit end process as the next jump destination (step S6500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Small hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting processing. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a "small hit open pattern". In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit open pattern”, for example, an open pattern of “0.1 second open” is set for each of the first and second times. Since "small hit" does not have the concept of "round", "open pattern" is also written as "first open" and "second open".

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets, for example, twice the number of times of opening of the special winning opening based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of times of release set here is stored, for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hit open timer. The value of the timer set here is an open time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit open timer, and such open time is most likely to be a prize winning opening during one open. It becomes short (it becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a firing interval of the game balls by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is a standby time for each opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

  Step S6220: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning apparatus management process (FIG. 40). Then, the main control CPU 72 executes small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S6300) next.

[Small hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a small hit large winning opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating, it can be checked whether the interval timer is counting down.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it can not be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the open timer countdown set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 41) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the open time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S6308. Run.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 (the first large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal inputted from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one opening at the small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning prize apparatus management process (FIG. 40). Then, when the small hit variable winning prize device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the small hit time large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the current stage, the main control CPU 72 executes the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the release time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set to a short time, the main control CPU 72 usually proceeds to step S6310 before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number at the time of small hit. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has ended.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 41).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less is checked. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. The end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 40) is restored. When the small hit large winning opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing becomes 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning apparatus management process. Then, when the small hitting variable winning prize device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small hitting big winning hole closing process.

[Small hit big winning opening closing process]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small hit large winning opening closing process. The small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the set release number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 41). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation processing.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hitting variable winning device management process (FIG. 40).

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small jump large winning opening opening and closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hitting game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 40). Run. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hitting large winning opening closing processing again, and until the actual opening number reaches the set opening number (twice) The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  If the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit has reached the set number of times of opening (step S6414: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6418 next.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the open number counter (= 0), the next jump destination is set as the small hit end process.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hitting variable winning device management process (FIG. 40). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit time end process is selected this time.

[Small hit time end processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of an example of a small hit termination process. The small hit time end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hit time is ended. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each call of this module) as time passes.

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the small hit time end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet zero, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the small hit variable winning prize apparatus management process (FIG. 40).

  After that, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the lapse of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), erases "small hit" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, in particular, the internal condition device does not operate, such a procedure is merely intended to erase the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning prize device management process.

[Game flow]
FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “the low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the “low probability state”. Thus, since [F1] normal mode is "low probability non-time shortening state", by making the game ball enter the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is It will progress.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when you win the big hit of [F2] “9 round symbol 1”, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F4] loses in the battle of the big game , [F5] shift to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the beach mode, if the result of the winning is not obtained and the special symbol changes 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when the big hit of [F7] "9 round symbol 2" is won, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] wins in the battle of the big game.

  Then, when the game ball passes the definite change area in the seventh round of the [F9] 9th round big hit game (when the V is awarded), the effect indicating that the [F10] V prize is generated is executed, and the [F11] fireworks are displayed. Transition to rush.

  [F11] Fireworks rush is a high probability time shortening state. [F11] If the result of winning is not obtained in the fireworks rush and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, the system shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

  On the other hand, although it corresponds to [F13] 9 round symbol 2, when the game ball does not pass the definite change area in the seventh round of the big hit game (when it does not win the V prize), the so-called positive change punk, [ F14] An effect indicating that a V winning has not occurred is executed, and the process shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

If it corresponds to the big hit of 9 round design 3 and 16 round design with [F5] coast mode and [F11] fireworks rush, 16 round big hit game is executed. And, when the game ball passes the definite change area in the seventh round of the 9 round big hit 3 or 16 round big hit game, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush, with the 9 round big hit 3 or 16 round big hit game 7 round If the gaming ball has not passed the definite variation area (if the definite variation is punctured), the mode shifts to [F5] coast mode.
Note that the above-described game flow is an example of a representative game flow and does not cover all the game flow.

[Example of effect image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described by giving some examples. As described above, when a big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. (Symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are displayed on the 7-segment LED, they have poor appeal in appearance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect pattern is performed as described above.

  The effect symbols include, for example, three left effect symbols, middle effect symbols and right effect symbols, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is, for example, a design of a picture tag to which a character is attached together with numerals "1" to "9". Here, the left rendering symbol, the middle rendering symbol, and the right rendering symbol constitute symbol rows in which the numbers are arranged in the descending order of “9” to “1”. Such symbol rows are displayed fluctuatingly so as to flow (scrolling) in the vertical direction in the left area, the middle area and the right area on the screen.

  FIG. 46 is a continuous view showing an example of a effect image corresponding to variable display and stop display of a special symbol. In addition, about the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (loss), an example of the fluctuation display production performed using a production design and the stop display production (result display production) is represented here. This variation display effect is a line between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but also the second special symbol) starts the variable display and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of effects that are In addition, the stop display effect is an effect representing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before describing the specific content of the control process, a basic flow of the variable display effect for each fluctuation and the stop display effect adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuating display]
(A) in FIG. 46: For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (state not under demonstration effect), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also in the state of being stopped.

  Further, at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (the reference symbols M1 and M2 are added in the figure) indicating the numbers of stored memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. . The markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective displayed numbers (the number of display of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) The displayed number also increases or decreases in conjunction with a change in the number of activated memories in the game. Also, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o) to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed in the form of. In the example of (A) in FIG. 46, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (in broken lines) It shows that the operation memory number of the 2nd special symbol is 0 by becoming (the memory number display production execution means).

  Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (with reference symbols Z1 and Z2 in the drawing) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols described above, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation symbols of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely simple colors (for example, a figure of “□”) with a color, and for example, it is possible to express variable display by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  In addition, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the detachment. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is properly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "9 round big hit" or "16 round big hit" instead of "off", the fourth symbol in a mode (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.) corresponding to them. Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variation display production start]
(B) in FIG. 46: For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by the scroll movement of three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect) Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the left display symbol, the middle display symbol and the row of the right display symbol scroll vertically (flow) in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The production is started. In the figure, the variable display of the effect pattern is simply indicated by the downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, by displaying (transparent display) the individual effect pattern in a transparent state, it is displayed in a state where the image (background image) serving as the background of the effect pattern is easily visible at this time on the display screen. It is done.

  The background image in this case is, for example, a scene in which a female character dressed in a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if it is cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode on presentation is, for example, the “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the above-described time shortening function is inoperative and the probability fluctuation function is also inoperative. In addition to this, various modes are provided in effect, and background images having different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display effect execution means). The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time reduction state" or corresponds to the "high probability state". Although not particularly illustrated here, after that, for example, an image such as a character or an item may be displayed on the display screen to perform a notice effect.

  Further, during the variable display of the production symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a variable manner at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color.

[Left symbol stop]
(C) in FIG. 46: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left staging symbol stops fluctuating first. In this example, it indicates that the effect design symbol representing the numeral "8" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In addition, illustration of a background image is abbreviate | omitted here (the same also after this).

[Example of effect when working memory number decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) in the previous FIG. 46, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 interlocks with it. It is reduced by one. For example, if the number of activated memories is four by then, only one of the oldest (oldest) memorized number displays in the marker M1 is not displayed, and effects to be consumed by the internal lottery are also performed. As a result, the player can be taught that the number of operating memories has decreased with respect to the first special symbol.

  Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 46, since the working memory at the top in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three become, three markers M1 remaining on the screen are respectively one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here, the left direction) is performed. Thus, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed on the stage, and the player can be taught intuitively that "the working memory has been consumed and one has been reduced". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 46: Following the left effect pattern, the right effect pattern stops changing thereafter. In this example, it indicates that the effect design symbol representing the numeral "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has been determined that no reach condition has already occurred at this point, it is almost apparent in appearance that this change is a non-reach (normal) change. In addition, we shall exclude reach change by slip pattern etc. here. With "slip pattern", for example, once the production design symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, the production design symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding one design part of the symbol row, thereby developing into reach It is something to do. Alternatively, once the production design symbol representing the numeral "9" is stopped, the design pattern representing the numeral "8" is stopped by sliding one symbol in the opposite direction to the pattern row in the reverse direction, and the pattern developed to reach by this also. is there. In addition to this, for example, after the rendering design symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, when the character appears on the screen and the right rendering symbol row is re-varied, the number "8" is represented. There is also a pattern that the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop indication effect]
(E) in FIG. 46: In synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, the final middle effect symbol stops. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the stop display effect is also performed in the non-winning (missing) mode. It will be. That is, in the example of illustration, it represents that the production | presentation symbol showing the number "1" was stopped in the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the combination of the production | presentation design is "8"-"1"-"3". As it is a breakout point, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the usual "dropout". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the detachment.

  The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed using the effect pattern for each change of one time. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for winning and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery on the effect.

  Further, although the above example is for non-winning time, after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect at the time of the big hit (winning), in the stop display effect, the production symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol internally selected by the main control CPU 72 (the stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing a flow of reach effect executed at the time of big hit (winning) in the case of falling into “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” in the non-time-shortened state. Here, in addition to the reach effect, it is assumed that the variable display effect, the stop display effect and the notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach effect) to be executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  For the following reach effects, for example, the first special symbol is a “9 round symbol 1” or a “9 round symbol 2” aspect after the variation display according to the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is performed in the first special symbol display device 34 For example, it is executed until it is stopped and displayed by “self”, “Yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ” etc. of 7-segment LED (reach Effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 47, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only to the number. The illustration of the markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 is omitted here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of presentation.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 47 (A): For example, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the left rendering symbol, the middle rendering symbol and the row of the right rendering symbol are in the vertical direction (for example, from above The variable display effect is started by scrolling down).

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the first stage)]
In (B) in FIG. 47: Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, a notice effect before reaching the first stage of reach is performed using a design image (picture card) of the character. The pre-reach advance notice effect is a pre-order effect in which a change in aspect progresses in stages from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) in accordance with a predetermined order. The design image used for the advance notice of this reach occurrence is located in front of the effect design that is variably displayed on the screen, and is displayed, for example, as appearing from the left edge of the screen (other appearances May be). In addition, "a notice before reach occurrence" here means that it announces the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit, before one of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such “reach advance notice production”, an effect of having the player a sense of expectation that “the reach may be developed = the possibility of a big hit is increased” can be obtained.

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 47: After the first stage aspect of the advance notice generation before the reach occurrence is executed, subsequently, the change of the aspect of the preliminary announcement effect before the reach generation progresses to the second stage. Here, as the advance notice production before reaching the second stage reach, production using a pattern image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image appears additionally from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Also, the design image displayed at this time is larger in size than the design image displayed earlier. And, the effect by the acoustic output that the character expressed by the design image emits a line (for example, "I become reach" etc.) is also performed together.

  The prior notice effect for reaching the second stage (second stage) using such a second design image is one step ahead from the preliminary announcement effect for the first stage of reach (first stage) performed in (B) in FIG. It is an evolutionary type. In general, the term "step-up notice" or the like may be used to refer to the aspect of "pre-reach advance notice effect" that develops in this manner. Here, an example is given in which the second step pattern image appears in the notice effect before the reach occurrence, but in the effect mode, the third step, fourth step, and fifth step pattern images appear and appear one after another. It may be. Further, for example, each time the design images of the third, fourth and fifth stages appear and appear one after another, the size may be enlarged. In addition, the fluctuation display of the production design is continued even at this stage. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit in the present change by advancing the change of the mode of the advance notice generation before reaching the reach to more stages. (For example, progress to the 5th stage suggests the highest degree of expectation etc.).

[Stop of left production pattern]
In (D) of FIG. 47, it is near to the middle of the variable display effect, and eventually the variable display of the left effect pattern is stopped. At this time, the effect pattern representing the numeral "5" is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
(E) in FIG. 47: Subsequently to the left effect design, for example, the variable display of the right effect design is stopped. At this time, since the effect pattern representing the numeral "5" is stopped at the right position of the screen, a reach state of "5"-"during variation"-"5" is generated. Then, on the screen, an image emphasizing one line in a reach state is displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as "reach!" Is also performed. Furthermore, in this case, if the numbers "5" are aligned, the expectation of the big hit in "9 round pattern 2" becomes high, so it is not only a mere lottery success or failure, "what kind of symbol to win, mere It is possible for the player to have various tensions such as “off”.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the outcome of the winning has not been revealed yet). In the reach effect, only the effect pattern corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. In this case, the effect design may be displayed in the four corners of the screen in a reduced state.

[Prevailing production after reach occurrence (first)]
(F) in FIG. 47: When reach condition occurs for a while, for example, the notice effect (the first time) is performed after reach occurrence in which the images representing the figure of "heart" form a group and obliquely pass on the screen. . In this case, since the image of "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as it flows, this can enhance the visual appeal for the player. By executing the notice effect after such a visually bustling reach notice occurrence, it is possible to obtain an effect of making the player have a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In (G) in FIG. 47, following the notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row, and An effect is taken that the image of the numeral is erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", etc. from the head (front). Such a rendition is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (or suggesting) to the player that the jackpot is "big hit" if the number "5" remains without being erased to the end. In addition, it is a "big hit" when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, and it is "out" when the number "5" is also erased. In the case of an out of place, for example, the numeral “6” is displayed on the screen after the numeral “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, “4”, the sense of tension and expectation of the player will also increase. Then, if the effect proceeds while the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the number "5" remains on the screen, the possibility of "big hit" increases, so the player feels tense there. It also rises rapidly.

[Prevailing production after reach occurrence (second time)]
In (H) in FIG. 47: When reach production approaches the end of the game, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were divided into large shots, and that the character emits some lines (or silently) The notice effect (the second time) is performed after the reach occurrence of the content of smile). At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development such as “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being deleted, the possibility of the big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases. Therefore, by causing the character image to appear largely at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to have a sense of expectation that "it may become a big hit".

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there are developments such as "If the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased and finally the number" 5 "remains without being erased, it becomes a big hit. When an image of a character is made to appear at such a timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to have a sense of anticipation that "the jackpot may be closer."

[Stop indication effect]
In FIG. 47 (I): For example, the final middle effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, internally, the winning symbol corresponds to either "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2", but while making the type of the winning symbol undisclosed, for example, "5" By stopping and displaying the effect symbol representing “at the center of the screen, an effect is given to teach the player that this time corresponds to either“ 9 round symbol 1 ”or“ 9 round symbol 2 ”. .

  (J) in FIG. 47: Then, for example, in substantially synchronized with the finalized display of the first special symbol, the finalized display is performed also for the stop display effect as the presentation symbol. The stop display effect of the effect pattern is performed, for example, in the state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined on the effect. Conversely speaking, it is not disclosed to the player that "9 round symbol 1 was won or 9 round symbol 2 was won" by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect Can be

  In addition, when it corresponds to "9 round pattern 2", the following rendering methods are employable. That is, when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 2" internally, the even-numbered effect symbols are temporarily displayed for a while, and the effect symbols of "7" are stopped and displayed by the second variation (for example, re-lottery effect) It is possible to execute an effect that clearly teaches that it corresponds to the 9 round symbol 2 ".

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, since the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed with an out symbol, the stop display effect is performed in the same manner as the effect symbol. In this case, by displaying the numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" at the center of the screen, an effect of notifying that the present fluctuation did not result in a big hit is performed unfortunately. In addition, such an effect is performed as "outside reach effect".

[Demonstration example of production during the big game executed when winning in the normal mode]
FIG. 48 to FIG. 50 are continuous views partially showing an example of an effect in a special effect during an award in the normal mode.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of “9 round symbol 1”, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed in a major role, and when “9 round symbol 2” is in effect An effect of winning the character over the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

[1st round]
(A) in FIG. 48: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND 1” is displayed on the screen, and battle rendition during a major role is started. In the illustrated example, an image of a ghost of an umbrella character enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, an image of a female character character being an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character "VS" is displayed at the center of the screen. Is displayed. In this way, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect is to be started.

  Further, at the lower right corner position of the screen, a rendering symbol (in this case, a rendering symbol of "5") corresponding to the winning symbol of this time is displayed. As described above, by continuing to display the winning symbol (so-called "left eye") even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue teaching the player information "I was won with the effect symbol of 5". In the second round of the big hit game, the same effects as in the first round are executed.

[The third round]
(B) in FIG. 48: When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle rendition in the big game proceeds specifically. In the illustrated example, an effect is taken that the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left to the right. Then, a woman character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and runs away, and it is directed to disappear on the right side of the screen.

[The fourth round]
(C) in FIG. 48: When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle rendition in the big game proceeds specifically. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and it is known that a flame (orla) appears in the meantime.

[5th round]
(D) in FIG. 48: And, in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the umbrella character plays out a special move for causing the long tongue to pop out of the mouth, and the female character takes on the special move at a fight. In this state, if the ghost of the umbrella wins, it means that the "9 round design 1" has made a big hit, and if the female character has won, it means that the "9 round design 2" makes a big hit There is.

[6th round (9 round symbol 1 winning time)]
(E) in FIG. 49: In the case of winning in 9th round symbol 1, defeat presentation is performed in the 6th round. Specifically, along with the characters "defeat · · · ·, the ghost of the umbrella is displayed large, and the female character is displayed small (friend character defeat production).
In addition, in the sixth round when winning in the ninth round symbol 1, the first variable winning device 30 opens four times, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the benefit from the ball is hardly obtained .

[7th round (9 round symbol 1 winning time)]
(F) in FIG. 49: In the case of winning in the ninth round, symbol 1, the re-challenge promoting effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character emits a line such as "The next will not lose!" By this, it is possible to give the player the motivation to aim for a big hit again. In addition, in the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same re-challenge promotion effect as the seventh round is executed. In addition, in the seventh round when winning in the ninth round symbol 1, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, but because the opening time is set extremely short, almost no profit from the ball is obtained . Also, even if the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the solenoid for probability change area 99 does not operate, so the game ball will not pass through the probability change area.

[At the end of the major role]
In (G) in FIG. 49, at the timing (during the end processing) that the big hit game with 9 round symbol 1 ends, the big-prize end effect of the content teaching the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, character information "coast mode rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big end completion effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "low probability time shortening state" coast mode as a benefit after the end of the big hit game.

[6th round (9 round symbol 2 winning time)]
(H) in FIG. 50: On the other hand, in the case of winning with the 9th round symbol 2, a winning effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed in a large size, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a small size together with the character of "winning !!" (friend character winning effect).
In addition, in the sixth round when winning in the ninth round symbol 2, the first variable winning device 30 opens four times, but because the opening time is set extremely short, the benefit from the ball is hardly obtained .

[7th round (9 round symbol 2 win time)]
In FIG. 50 (I): in the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 7th round. If it succeeds in this challenge production, it will rush into the fireworks rush which is "high probability time shortening state". Specifically, an instructional effect in which the character of the Sennin utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to transmit game characteristics such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. In addition, since the opening pattern of the second variable winning device 31 in the long opening time is set in the opening pattern of the seventh round when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the profit from the ball is the same as in the previous rounds Is obtained. Furthermore, since the solenoid 99 for the probability change area is activated in the seventh round when winning to the 9 round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is the slide member 330 for the probability change area It is guided by and passes through the definite change area.

  In FIG. 50 (J): Then, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes the definite change area by the player continuing to hit the right, the panda character raises a V mark in a blessing effect Is executed. In addition, also in the eighth round and the ninth round of the jackpot game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. However, in the eighth and ninth rounds when winning in the ninth round symbol 2, the first variable winning device 30 opens one time each, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the profit by the ball Can hardly be obtained.

[At the end of the major role]
In (K) in FIG. 50: at the timing when the big hit game is over (during the end processing), the big-event end effect of the content teaching the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big end completion effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" fireworks rush as a bonus after the end of the big hit game.

[Display example of fireworks rush]
FIG. 51 is a continuous view showing an example of a fireworks rush effect. This fireworks rush corresponds to the big hit of "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" or "16 round symbol", and it moves after the big hit game when the game ball passes the definite variation area during the big hit game Mode. Fireworks rush is a high probability time reduction state, and is a chance zone that continues until the special symbol changes 170 times after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In FIG. 51 (A): For example, by performing the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "firework rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image in which "a scene where a fireworks is launched in the night sky" and "a scene where a woman character is watching fireworks" is expressed in order to deeply impress the motif of the fireworks on the player. It has become. In the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed.

  In addition, information on the number of winning events and information on the number of time savings are displayed on the screen. For example, in the lower left part of the screen, the number of balls acquired during a big hit such as "700 shots" is displayed, and in the upper right part of the screen, the remaining number of times of reduction such as "remaining 169 times" is displayed. The information on the number of winnings acquired and the information on the number of times of time saving are changed each time the information is updated, and the display in the screen is also changed. For example, when the big hit in the time saving state is continuously performed, and the number of winning events increases, the display at the lower left of the screen also displays the total value so far such as "2700 shots" and "4700 shots" . In addition, every time the variable display of the special symbol is performed during the time shortening state, a value obtained by subtracting the display at the upper right part of the screen such as "remaining 168 times" or "remaining 167 times" is displayed.

  (B) in FIG. 51: Then, all the presentation symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7") by the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game. "). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 51: When the next change is started, the second change display is performed after the end of the big hit game. In addition, although the example of illustration shows the change display of the production design accompanying the change display of the first special symbol, in the high probability time shortening state, since the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is performed with high frequency, the game As long as the player continues to hit the right, the second and subsequent variable display after the end of the big hit game is often the variable display of the production symbol according to the variable display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 52 to FIG. 55 are continuous views showing an example of effects performed when winning or losing in a fireworks rush.
The following example of effects is an example of effect performed when it corresponds to a big hit of "16 round pattern" by fireworks rush, or when out-of-reach reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In FIG. 52 (A): The variation display of the effect design is performed in the state of "firework rush". In the illustrated example, a background image in which "a female character is watching fireworks" is displayed together with "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky". In the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 is changed. It is displayed.

  (B) in FIG. 52: An effect is produced in which, for example, a female character emits a line saying "Katsuyo !!". By performing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that "a game of some sort will start from now on". In addition, from this point on, in order to display the effect for making the ally character and the enemy character compete against each other on the entire screen, the variable display effect is executed in the reduced state at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”) -"In motion"-"in motion").

  In FIG. 52 (C): For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the letter "VS" appears in the center of the screen. The effect to be performed is performed. In this way, it is possible to teach the player that battle reach effect is to be started. In addition, the reach state is occurring in the effect pattern variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"during variation"-"2").

  (D) in FIG. 53: Then, the battle reach effect proceeds specifically after this. In the illustrated example, an effect is performed in which a panda character moves toward a female character. Then, the female character is surprised and runs away, and it is directed to disappear on the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 53 (E): Now, a female character takes out a drum (weapon), and an effect is produced in which a flame appears from the drum. In this example of effect, an effect of fighting an enemy character is performed using a drum, but for example, an effect of fighting an enemy character can also be performed using a fan. Thus, by changing the weapon used for the battle, the degree of expectation of the big hit can be changed.

  (F) in FIG. 53: An effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum in the direction of the panda character.

  In (G) in FIG. 54: Following this, an effect that a wave is launched from the drum is executed. It will be a big hit if you can defeat the panda character in this state.

[At the time of disconnection]
In (H) in FIG. 54: when the variation of the special symbol this time falls under non-winning, an effect is performed in which the panda character successfully manages the wave emitted from the drum.

  (I) in FIG. 54: When the character of the panda is displayed large and the character of the female is displayed small as well as the characters "defeat · · · · · · ·," the player is notified that the player is not elected. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect pattern is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  In FIG. 54 (J): In this case, the stop display effect as the effect pattern is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect pattern is performed, for example, in the state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  And since the fireworks rush is continued after this, the player will aim for the next big hit during the fireworks rush. However, if the present change is the final change in the fireworks rush (the 170th change after the end of the big hit game), the fireworks rush is ended, and the mode shifts to the low probability non-time shortened state normal mode.

[At the time of 16 round big hit winning]
In Fig. 54 (K): On the other hand, when the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to the 16 round big hit, a wave collides with the character of the panda, which causes an explosion and the character of the panda is blown away The presentation is performed.

  In (L) of FIG. 54, when the female character is displayed large and the panda character is displayed small together with the characters “winning !!”, it is transmitted to the player that the big hit (winning) is made. In addition, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect pattern reduced ("2"-"2"-"2"). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging to the left and right, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  In (M) in FIG. 54: Then, the rendering design is returned to the state in which the left, middle and right rendering designs have been restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging to the left and right, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotional production]
In FIG. 55 (N): From this point on, the promotion effect is started. Specifically, a three-arranged effect pattern is displayed gradually smaller, and an effect in which the three-arranged effect pattern is drawn to the back side on the screen while being rotated is executed.

  In FIG. 55 (O): Then, the three rendering symbols become so small that they can hardly be visually recognized. At that time, the image of the rendering switching button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the rendering switching button 45 is pressed. An effect to urge the player to the player is performed.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 55 (P): if the promotion effect is successful, that is, if it corresponds to the 16 round jackpot (“16 round symbol”) or the 9 round jackpot (“9 round symbol 3”), the promotion success indicator Is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is depressed, the effect pattern is popped out from the back side to the front side, and the effect pattern is enlarged and displayed to such an extent that all three effect patterns can not be displayed. , The number of the effect pattern is changed from "2" to "7". In the present embodiment, in the case of winning with the second special symbol, “9 round symbol 3” or “16 round symbol” is selected, and a promotion success effect is always executed. However, if you win the first special symbol in the fireworks rush, because it will be won in the "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2", the promotion failure "2" is maintained as it is The presentation is performed.

  In FIG. 55 (Q): substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the stop display effect is performed also for the effect pattern. The stop display effect of the effect pattern is performed in a state where the effect pattern is completely stopped without shaking. In addition, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color or the like) corresponding to the 16 round big hit ("16 round symbol"). Then, after that, it enters a special bonus that will be a big hit in 16 rounds, and on the screen, a middle role effect is executed.

[During production]
FIG. 56 is a continuous view partially showing an example of special effect during special effects (special bonus effect) to be executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to “16 round symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 56A (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big playing effect of contents having contents corresponding to the progress of the big hit game is executed. In the special role in effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed in the screen. Further, at the lower right corner position of the screen, a rendering symbol (here, the number "7") corresponding to the winning symbol of this time is displayed. As described above, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "left eye") even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue teaching the player that the information has been won with the effect symbol of 7 ". In the lower area of the display screen, the characters "special bonus" are displayed, and around the screen, an image of a female character who performs a peace sign over a horse is displayed.

[7 rounds]
(B) in FIG. 56: In the case of winning in the 16th round symbol, the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. If it succeeds in this challenge production, it will rush into the fireworks rush which is high probability time shortening state. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the character of the Sennin utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" As a result, it is possible to transmit game characteristics such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31 to the player. In addition, the opening pattern of the seventh round when winning with the 16th round symbol is set to open the second variable winning device 31 in a long opening time, so the profit from the ball is the same as the previous rounds. can get. Furthermore, since the solenoid 99 for the probability change area is activated in the seventh round when winning the 16th round symbol, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball enters the slide member 330 for the probability change area It is guided and passes through a definite change area.

  (C) in FIG. 56: When the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes the definite change area by the player continuing to hit the right, the V mark is displayed beside the jumping female character. The displayed blessing effect is executed. In addition, also in the eighth round and the ninth round of the jackpot game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. Also, in the eighth and ninth rounds when winning with the sixteenth round symbol, the first variable winning device 30 opens one time each, but the opening time is set to be long (at 29 seconds) as in the seventh round. Therefore, as with the previous rounds, you can get the benefits from the game.

[16 rounds]
(D) in FIG. 56: After this, when the jackpot game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 16" is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed. Further, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the above-mentioned effect pattern (number "7") as the "left eye" is continuously displayed.

[At the end of the major role]
(E) in FIG. 56: At the timing when the big hit game ends, a big-prize end effect of contents teaching the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big end completion effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" fireworks rush as a bonus after the end of the big hit game.

[Example of production of coast mode]
FIG. 57 is a continuous view showing an example of effect of the beach mode. This beach mode is after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1" or during the big hit game of what corresponds to "9 round symbol 2", "9 round symbol 3" or "16 round symbol" In this mode, the game is shifted after the end of the jackpot game when the game ball has not passed through the probability change area. The coast mode is the “low probability time shortening state”. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  (A) in FIG. 57: For example, after the end of the big hit game with “9 round symbol 1”, the first variable display is performed, and the variable display of the production symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. There is. The background image of the coast mode is a background image having a motif of images of "sand beach", "sea", "mountain", etc. in order to express the impression of healing which is the concept of the coast mode. In the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed.

  In the upper right part of the screen, the remaining number of time reductions such as "remaining 77 times" is displayed, and in the lower left part, the number of winnings acquired such as "700 shots" is displayed.

  (B) in FIG. 57: Then, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“1”-“1”-“5”) by the end of the current variation (at the time of non-winning). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 57: Then, the next change is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining the result of winning. When the coast mode ends, it shifts to the low probability non-time reduced state normal mode. In addition, when the result of a prize is obtained in coast mode, reach production is performed and it becomes a big hit.

  Next, an example of the special effects in the fireworks rush (high probability time shortening state) and the coast mode (low probability time shortening state) will be described.

[Example of special effects in time reduction state]
FIG. 58 to FIG. 61 are continuous views partially showing an example of the special effect performed in the time-shortened state.
In the present embodiment, predetermined conditions (for example, requiring a variation time capable of performing special effects and having been selected in a special effect execution lottery) during the fireworks rush or the coast mode are included. If the conditions are met, special effects are performed.

  (A) in FIG. 58: For example, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the variation display effect by the three rendering symbols is also started. Here, in the screen, the number of acquired ball appearances such as “16,150 shots” is displayed in the lower left portion, and the remaining number of time reductions such as “remaining 111 times” is displayed in the upper right portion. In the upper part of the screen, the number of time-savings when a big hit occurs during the time-saving state is displayed in order. For example, the displayed "8 times BONUS" indicates that the time saving number is the eighth big hit, and "super BONUS" has the time saving number of 1 to 4 times and the big hit close hit is a big hit “Gurious BONUS” represents that the number of time-savings is 167-170 times, which means a big hit near the end of the time-saving state.

  (B) in FIG. 58: When the variation display of the special symbol proceeds smoothly, and the left production symbol is about to stop from now on, the special symbol different from the normal left production symbol in which the normal number and the female character are written It is shown that the left effect design is scrolling. Thus, the player can be taught that the special effect is to be started. In addition, although the display of the acquisition number of balls in the lower left part of the screen is hidden with the start of the special effect, it may be displayed as it is.

  (C) in FIG. 58: Thereafter, the special left effect pattern stops at the center of the screen. The contents described in this special left effect design symbol represent the numbers of the hundredth or more of the acquired number of balls displayed in the lower left part of the screen, and for example, a number such as "161" is written. . In addition, the shape of the special left effect design is also the same as the information related to the number of acquired balls displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  In (D) of FIG. 59, when the variation display of the special symbol proceeds smoothly, the special right rendering symbol “0 shot” is scrolled following the normal right rendering symbol and then stopped at the center of the screen. At this time, among the three reduced production symbols in the lower right of the screen, the middle production symbol fluctuates, and the remaining left and right ones are stopped at “7” and are in the reach state. Represents that.

  In FIG. 59 (E): After that, when the variation display of the special symbol reaches the final stage, the special in-direction effect pattern “5” is scrolled following the normal in-direction effect pattern, and then stopped at the screen center. As described above, the special three effects "161", "5", and "0 shot" are lined up after scrolling and stopped at the center of the screen after the special effect, and the acquired number of balls "16 150 shots" is displayed large become. Also, in the lower right part of the screen, the three production symbols stop at the combination of "777", indicating that the result of the variation display of the special symbol this time is a big hit.

  In FIG. 59 (F): Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the three effect symbols at the lower right of the screen are enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the variation display of the special symbol of this time has ended with a big hit.

  In the above, special effects at the time of a big hit have been described, but at special effects at the time of departure, special middle effect symbols do not stop at the center of the screen as shown in (E) in FIG. You may perform the production | presentation which can not display the normal inside production | presentation pattern which was done and can not display the number of ball acquisitions. Besides, in the above, although it was displayed as a result of becoming a big hit by being displayed large as “16,150 shots”, the number of winning games has developed, but the reach is achieved by showing the number of winning games. It may result in development. For example, when the special effect pattern in (D) in FIG. 59 is “161” “↓” “0 shot”, the three effect patterns in the lower right part of the screen are “7 ↓ 、”, and in FIG. At the time of the special production design of “161” “5” “0 shot”, the 3 production design in the lower right part of the screen reach the “7 ↓ 7” reach status, and then the battle reach production after (C) in FIG. 52 May develop into That is, the stopping of a special rendering pattern may be treated as if a chance is established. As described above, unlike the effect pattern in the ordinary tempai display, the player is made to increase the recognizability by executing the special effect using the special effect pattern representing the number of acquired balls, as the temporary stop state. As well as facilitating the process, it is possible to make it easy to leave an impression of the acquired ball quantity which is cumulatively updated, and to make it possible for the player to recognize that it is a chance. In addition, the case of the variable display effect which makes at least one symbol of the special effect design described as “161”, “5”, “0 shot” as the incomplete state which does not lead to the temporary stop display is provided, in that case In order to avoid the above-mentioned effect development, the player may be made to continue to have a sense of expectation until all of the special effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the screen.

  In addition, from the normal state that can be expressed only to the hundreds place (for example, 999) by three rendering symbols adjacent to each other, the representation from the thousand places (for example, 9999) or 10,000 places (for example, 99999) It can be realized by replacing a special effect design (1 design that changes the state of 1 design = 1-digit notation into 2-digit notation or 3-digit notation change status) based on the acquired number of balls updated and stored each time It will be. Therefore, if you have a large number of rounds of big hit games that you can get more profits than big hit games and small hit games that have few rounds that you can't get much profits (ball games), that result A difference can be clearly recognized by a special effect pattern during the variable display effect (for example, the effect branch timing of whether or not the previous effect contents are developed thereafter).

  As described above, the special effect using the special effect design (special effect pattern) based on the information on the acquired number of balls is performed during the variation display of the special symbol during the time shortening state. Therefore, unlike a normal effect pattern, a special effect using a special effect pattern representing the number of acquired ball numbers that is stored and increased each time according to the results (series) which have played a plurality of big hit games is executed This makes it easy to leave an impression of the acquired number of ball increments updated temporarily, and is achieved for the game during the variable display effect (for example, the effect branch timing of whether or not the previous effect contents are developed thereafter) It is possible to suppress the giving of feeling and the decrease in interest.

Next, another example of special effects will be described. For example, as shown in (D) of FIG. 59, it is assumed that the special left rendering symbol and the right rendering symbol representing the number of acquired balls are stopped, and the special middle rendering symbol is stopped from now.
In FIG. 60 (E): After that, when the variation display of the special symbol reaches the middle, the special middle effect symbol “5” scrolls following the normal middle effect symbol, and then stops at the center of the screen. At that time, character information such as "NEXT" is displayed on the upper left of the special left effect design. Therefore, information such as "NEXT" is displayed with three special effect design symbols "161", "5", and "0 shot" representing the number of winning balls acquired. Also, in the lower right part of the screen, the three rendering symbols represent the reach state of "777".

  In FIG. 60 (F): Thereafter, the three special effect design symbols “161”, “5”, and “0 shot” representing the number of balls obtained are moved to the lower part of the screen, and another special effect pattern on each of them The effect of scrolling is executed. For example, on the special left production design written as "161", a special left production design written as "20" is dropped and stopped, and then "0 shot" is written. A special right-handed design symbolized as “0 shot” is falling onto the special right-handed design.

  60 (G) in FIG. 60: And three special effect design symbols “161”, “5” and “0 shot” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and “20” and “0 shot” at the top of the screen so as to correspond respectively In the state where the special left and right effect design symbols described are stopped and displayed, the special middle effect design symbol described as "0" is falling.

  In FIG. 61 (H): Thereafter, when the variation display of the special symbol reaches the end of the game, if the variation display of the special symbol this time is a big hit, the special middle effect design symbolized as “0” is displayed on the upper screen. Will stop. As a result, in the screen, the special effect design stops at the combination of “161”, “5”, “0 shot” in the lower stage, and in the upper row, it is different in the combination of “20”, “0”, “0 shot” The special rendering pattern of will stop. Therefore, it is possible to teach the player that a new number of balls “2000” different from the number of balls obtained “16,150” has appeared. Also, in the lower right part of the screen, the three production symbols stop at the combination of "777", indicating that the result of the variation display of the special symbol this time is a big hit.

  In FIG. 61 (I): And in the screen, the combinations of the special effect designs on the upper and lower stages are united, and an effect of changing to a new special effect pattern is executed. For example, an effect that changes to a special effect pattern consisting of a combination of “181”, “5”, and “0 shot” is executed. Therefore, it is shown that the new number of balls "2000" is added to the number of balls obtained "16,150" so far. This makes it possible to teach the player that "2000 shots" can be obtained in the current big hit, and that the number of obtained "18 150 shots" will finally be obtained.

  In FIG. 61 (J): After that, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the three effect symbols in the lower right part of the screen are enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the variation display of the special symbol of this time has ended with a big hit.

  In this manner, the special rendition using the special rendition design based on the information relating to the expected number of balls that can be acquired from now on together with the special rendition pattern based on the information relating to the number of thugs acquired It is performed during the variable display. As described above, by executing the special effect, the impression of the number of acquired balls can be easily left, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game. In the above, special effects at the time of a big hit have been described, but at special effects at the time of departure, special middle effect symbols such as (G) in FIG. It is also possible to execute an effect in which the normal middle effect pattern that has been stopped is stopped and the number of balls scheduled to be acquired can not be displayed. In addition, the order in which the special effect pattern stops may be random without being limited to the order of left, right, and middle.

  In addition, it is not limited to the upper part of the special effect design which represents the number of balls acquired "16,150 shots" about another special effect pattern showing another new number of balls, such as "2000 shots", and the lower or front and back direction The symbol may be displayed in the vicinity of the symbol or partially overlapping, entirely overlapping, or the like. In addition, the display of another special effect design in which the number of balls that will be acquired from now on can be obtained is temporarily stopped immediately before the special effect design temporarily stops temporarily during the variable display operation, and temporarily stopped It may be displayed at any predetermined timing, such as immediately after being done. By displaying another special effect design in this manner, it is possible to give the player an impression that the acquired number of balls may increase by the number of balls expected afterward, and the variation display effect is being performed. It is easy to leave an impression of the number of winning balls, and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest for the game.

  In addition, during the variable display production (render branch timing), the award which is the sum of the stored number of balls acquired “161” “5” “0 shot” and the scheduled prize ball number “20” “0” “0 shot” Another special effect design "181," "5" "0 shot" of the aspect configuration based on the number of balls is the aspect configuration of the special effect design corresponding to the effect pattern or the number of award winning balls / the number of expected winning balls Can be rendered to be able to impart an exceptional sense of incongruity such as being replaced or added to appear differently and displaying a temporary stop. In this way, by displaying yet another special effect design in which the notation corresponding to the final number of balls including the scheduled result (the number of balls obtained in the assumed big hit) that can be acquired from now is displayed, It is possible to give the player an impression that the profit (expulsion) may be further increased due to the odd feeling of the increase notation different from the number of earned balls according to the results (games) of having performed a big hit game of While making it easy to increase the recognition of the number of acquired balls during the display effect, it is possible to make the impression easy to remain, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  62 to 66 are continuous views showing an example of the second special look-ahead effect. The pre-read effect related to the number of acquired balls shown on the special effect pattern will be described. This pre-reading effect is an effect to be performed in the fluctuation including another fluctuation display until the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the operation memory is performed when the first determination result about the new operation memory corresponds to the big hit . In addition, about the display which is not related to this 2nd special pre-reading effect, it omits and illustrates.

(A) in FIG. 62: The special symbol is in the stop display mode, and it is shown that the new special symbol is being displayed in a standby state. In addition, “18,150 shots” and the number of balls acquired so far are displayed.
(B) in FIG. 62: Thereafter, the variation display of the special symbol is started.
(C) in FIG. 62: Then, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, and the present result is represented in the screen by the combination of “678” and disengaging. Also, at that time, character information such as "+350 shots" will be displayed on the front of the right effect pattern. By this, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that there will be fluctuations in the future jackpot.

(D) in FIG. 62: Thereafter, in the lower right part of the screen, an effect of changing to character information such as "HOLD + 350 shots" is executed.
(E) in FIG. 63: The game proceeds and the next variable display is started, and the display of character information such as “HOLD + 350 shots” is maintained in the lower right portion of the screen.
(F) in FIG. 63: Then, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging, and the present result is represented in the screen by the combination of “123” and disengaging. Also, at that time, character information such as "+350 shots" will be displayed on the front of the right effect pattern. By this, it is possible to further have a sense of expectation that there will be fluctuations in the future jackpot.

In FIG. 63 (G): In FIG. 62 (D): Thereafter, in the lower right part of the screen, an effect of changing to character information such as “HOLD + 700 shots” is executed.
In FIG. 63 (H): The game proceeds and the next variable display is started, and the display of character information such as “HOLD + 700 shots” is maintained in the lower right part of the screen.

In FIG. 64 (I): When the variable display progresses, temporary stop effects are performed in which the effect symbols on which the numbers “7” are written respectively stay in the screen in a shaken state. Thus, the player can be taught that the current fluctuation will be a big hit. In this case, character information such as "+350 shots" will be displayed on the front of the right effect design. As a result, the player can be taught that the number of winnings at the present jackpot is to be further increased.
(J) in FIG. 64: Then, a re-variation presentation is performed in which the rendition symbol re-variates. In the lower right part of the screen, an effect of changing to character information such as "HOLD + 1050 shots" is executed.

(K) in FIG. 64: When the variable display progresses, temporary stop effect is performed in which the effect design on which each of the numbers “7” is written shakes in the screen in a state of swinging. At this time, two character information such as "+20 shots" and "+30 shots" will be displayed on the front of the right effect design. As a result, the player can be taught that the number of winnings at the present jackpot is to be further increased.
(L) in FIG. 64: Then, a re-variation presentation in which the rendition pattern re-variates is performed. In the lower right part of the screen, an effect of changing to character information such as "HOLD + 1100 shot" is executed.

  In FIG. 65 (M): After that, temporary fluctuation presentation and re-change presentation are performed several times, and when the variation display progresses to the end of the stage with “HOLD + 1800 shots” displayed, the numbers “7” are displayed on the screen. A temporary stop effect is performed that stays in the screen in a state where the described effect pattern is shaken. In this case, character information such as "+200 shots" will be displayed on the front of the right effect design.

  In FIG. 65 (N): When the final effect is performed at the end of the variable display, the special effect design symbols “20”, “0”, and “0 shot” are displayed in the center of the screen in the stopped state. . In this way, it is possible to teach the player that a total of 2000 balls can be obtained by the present big hit.

  In FIG. 65 (O): In addition, special rendering symbols respectively indicated as “40”, “0”, and “0 shot” are displayed in a stopped state. This teaches the player that the next big hit has been decided, and the big hit is able to get 2000 outings, and it is possible to obtain a total of 4000 outings by this and the next big hit. Can be taught.

(P) in FIG. 65: And, a big hit game that 2000 balls can be acquired is started.
In FIG. 66 (Q): The big hit game is over, and the variation display of the special symbol is started. Note that the display at the lower left part of the screen is updated to “20150 shots” due to the increase in the number of winning balls during the previous big hit.
66 (R) and (S) in FIG. 66: And in the screen, each of the effect symbols on which the number "7" is written is stopped, and a big hit game that 2000 balls can be won can be started. Become.

  In this way, by executing the second special look-ahead presentation effect that announces the planned appearance of the ball that can be acquired in stages, it is an opportunity to draw attention such as symbol stop to suggest or confirm notification of success or failure and multiple steps By notifying to, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to leave an impression pertaining to the winning ball.

  Next, the number of time reductions displayed as part of the background image in the time reduction state in FIGS. 58 to 61 will be described in detail. Specifically, every time a big hit occurs during the time reduction state, a time-shortened history image is displayed as a part of a background image in the display screen in which the time-shortened number of times of the big hit is written. FIG. 67 is a view showing an image example of the time-lapse number history image. FIG. 68 is a view showing an example of the display mode of the history background image. FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram showing a rendering example of the third special rendering in the case where the history background image satisfies the predetermined condition.

  As shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of types of time-shortening frequency history images are defined, and the type is set based on the number of time-shortening times at the time of big hit. Specifically, the type is set based on whether the time of the big hit is earlier or later than 170 times when the time saving state ends. For example, when the number of times of the big hit is 1 to 4 times, the display color of the image is gold, and a time-shortened history image with text information such as "super BONUS" is displayed in the image. The Rukoto. In addition, if the number of time saving is 5 to 45, the display color of the image is red, and character information (for example, "12 times BONUS" is written in the image that represents the number of time saving. The number of time saving is 46 to 46). If it is 90 times, the display color of the image is green, and character information (for example, “70 times BONUS”) is displayed in the image to indicate the number of time reductions. If the number of time reductions is 91 to 166, the image is displayed The color is blue, and character information (for example, "120 times BONUS" is written in the image to indicate the number of times of time reduction. If the number of times of time reduction is 167 to 170 times, the display color of the image is red, and the image Character information such as "Principle BONUS" is described inside.

  As shown in FIG. 68, a single color display mode and a gradation display mode are defined in the history background image as two types of display modes. Further, three display colors are defined in the single color display mode, and the display color is changed based on the average number of times of time reduction calculated from the history of time reductions. In the gradation display mode, the distribution of gradation changes based on the history of the number of times of time saving.

  For example, if the display mode is a single color display mode and the average time reduction is 1 to 45 times and the situation is a big hit at an early stage as compared with 170 times when the time reduction state ends, the history background The image is configured in red, and a plurality of time-saving history images are displayed in the red history background image. If the average number of shorting times is 46 to 90 times (a situation in which a big hit at least at the latest stage compared to 170 times when the time shortening state ends), the history background image is configured in green, and its green color A plurality of time-lapse history images are displayed in the history background image. If the average number of times of hourly reduction is 91 to 170 times (a situation in which a big hit occurs at a late stage compared to 170 times when the time reduction state ends), the history background image is composed of blue, and the blue history background image A plurality of time saving history images are displayed inside.

  In addition, when the display mode is the gradation display mode, if the time reduction number is "120 times, 168 times, 112 times, 169 times, 12 times, 34 times, 3 times, 19 times" in order, the time shortening state is started The history background image was changed from blue to red because it was a big hit at a later stage compared to 170 times when it was done, but represents a situation where a big hit was made earlier than 170 times at the latest. A historical background image consisting of a gradation distribution composed of changing display colors is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit game is executed during the time reduction state), it is next time after the execution of the special game (second big hit game) this time The special game variation count, which is the variation count at which the variation display of the symbol required until the special game (third big hit game) is executed, is counted. In addition, at the time of the variable display effect after the execution of the next special game (third big hit game), fluctuation frequency history information (for example, it is necessary until the next special game is executed) which represents the history of the counted first result It is possible to notify of the numerical value of the number of fluctuations of the symbol that has been Furthermore, change count history information representing the history of the second result counting the number of special game changes in the special game (first big hit game) before the execution of the special game (second big hit game) is made to coexist in sequence Further, it is possible to notify of the degree of stage based on the front and back relation for each of the special game fluctuation numbers according to the counting result (the first result and the second result). Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit game is executed during a time reduction state), a special game (hereinafter, also referred to as a consecutive hit big hit) which is continuously executed in time series is executed Each variation count history information based on the variation count of the symbol required is displayed in parallel and displayed one by one, and based on the variation count history information, it took to generate a big hit against the progress degree of the game after consecutive big hit An effect representing a step history relating to a period is performed.

  In addition, the special game (1st big hit game) before execution of this special game (2nd big hit game) is a continuous special game (previous special game, the last two special games) when predetermined conditions are continuously satisfied. It is also possible to include all of the game, the previous special game of the last time ..., etc.), or a predetermined number of consecutive special games (for example, with the previous time) based on the latest counting result It is also possible to limit for the last special game only). In this way, the player can intuitively compare and recognize the degree of stage related to the period required to generate each big hit at the time of the variable display effect of the production design after the big hit, and the interest for the future game can be enjoyed Can be suppressed.

In addition, the variable display of symbols after the execution of the special game this time (for example, the stop display of symbols that become a lottery result of consecutive lost) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 170 times) as the upper limit In order to make it correspond to the value of the special game fluctuation number according to the count until the next special game is executed in the number, the order range division (for example, 1 to 45 times) of multiple divisions based on within the upper limit number It is possible to set the first division, 46 to 90 second divisions, and 91 to 170 third division division frequency group division).
And, when notifying the number of times of fluctuation history information, the division range division of the number of times group based on the correspondence result of the value of the counted special game fluctuation number (for example, the range of whether it is the first division to the third division described above Staged-degree presentation is performed that enables different notifications to be made separately according to presentation modes according to.

For example, an effect representing a stage relating to a period required to generate the next big hit with respect to the degree of progress of the game after the consecutive big hit is performed by the color to be displayed.
As a specific example, when teaching the variation count history information of the variation count required to generate the next big hit, the variation count history information (for example, the icon display according to the numerical teaching of the special game variation count) or the periphery thereof Is displayed in red if the display color is different (including the color change of the icon display itself) and the number of changes required to generate the next big hit (for example, in the case of the first division described above) is small. When the number of changes is large (for example, in the case of the third division described above), it is displayed in blue, and when the number of changes is about the middle (for example, in the case of the second division described above), it is displayed in green.

As a result, if the variation count history information or the color around it is red, it is assumed that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode at an early period stage after the execution of the special game, and the condition of the game is good. It can be intuitively recognized by the player.
Besides, if the color is blue, it is assumed that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode in a late period after the execution of the special game, and the player can intuitively recognize that the condition of the game is bad. If it is green, it is assumed that the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner in a medium period stage after the execution of the special game, and the player can intuitively recognize that the condition of the game is a buzz.

In addition, notification of a special effect mode representing the degree of step required to generate the next big hit with respect to the degree of progress of the game after the consecutive villa big hit is performed by gradation display.
As a specific example, when teaching the variation count history information of the variation count that was required to generate the next big hit, the second of the variation count history information related to the nearest first result to be sequentially juxtaposed It was necessary to generate the next big hit gradually from the situation of the value with the large number of changes required to generate the next big hit in the predetermined section notification area leading to the display part of the predetermined number of variable count history information including the result When the number of times of change is changing to a state of a short value, it may be shown in a mode of changing from blue to red as gradation display (indicating stepwise change in density of display color).

Thereby, in the current game, the condition of the game related to whether the variation count after execution of each special game in the past has been stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode based on what period stage, It can be intuitively recognized whether it is changing.
In the present invention, the total sum of the special game fluctuation numbers calculated based on all or a plurality of predetermined fluctuation number history information including the latest ones that are represented by the fluctuation number history effect. It is determined that the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied based on the average according to (overall counting result) (when it becomes continuous that the number of times of the respective special effects corresponds to the value of the special game fluctuation frequency It is possible to consider.

FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram showing a rendering example of the third special rendering in the case where the history background image satisfies the predetermined condition.
In (a) of FIG. 69: For example, when the final effect is performed at the end of the variable display, if the history background image is a gradation distribution composed of display colors that change from blue to red, the closest jackpot is early In this case, the player's situation changes from a bad situation to a good situation and causes the player to recognize that the situation is rising. Therefore, if the current situation is a screaming tone or rising tone, a third special effect using a special effect pattern in which the number of award balls obtainable in the current big hit is written is executed. Also good. Specifically, the special effect design symbols “20”, “0”, and “0 shot” are displayed in the center of the screen in a stopped state. In this way, it is possible to teach the player that a total of 2000 balls can be obtained by the present big hit.

(B) in FIG. 69: Further, special effects designed respectively as “20”, “0” and “0 shot” are lowered from the top of the screen.
(C) in FIG. 69: Then, two sets of special rendering symbols described as “20” “0” “0” “0” “0” “0” “0” “0” unite, “40” “0” The special effect design indicated as “0 shot” is displayed in the stop state. This teaches the player that the next big hit has been decided, and the big hit is able to get 2000 outings, and it is possible to obtain a total of 4000 outings by this and the next big hit. Can be taught. After that, the big hit game where 2000 balls can be won is started.

In this manner, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode at an early period stage of a predetermined number of changes after execution of the special game, and the condition of the game is good, plural items are displayed during execution of the hit change display effect. When temporarily stopping the effect design pattern of, based on the normal effect pattern, instead of temporarily displaying temporarily to reach ten pie display (such as "7 · ・ · 7"), it is possible to change display by replacing it. The numbers of at least some of the places are temporarily displayed temporarily on the display corresponding to the total number of prize balls (such as "20 ·「 · 0 ") based on the special effect design.
Alternatively, instead of stopping and displaying the symbol combination (such as "7, 7, 7," etc.) of the big hit notification based on the normal effect design, it is replaced with the special effect design that enables variable display, and the total number of balls is awarded. The stop display on the corresponding numerical display (“20.0. 0”, etc.) causes the symbols to be stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode in a period stage earlier than the prescribed number of fluctuation times predetermined after execution of the special game. And make the player intuitively recognize that the current condition is good based on the variable display effect different from usual.

  In addition, the total number of prize balls that the player pays attention to (for example, a notification including the total number of prize balls scheduled to be used for the prior determination about the contents to be added to the total number of prize balls paid out An impression can be made easy to be left as a special presentation mode using the number of balls acquired that is equal to or greater than all balls acquired up to the present state).

  Next, an example of a control method for realizing the above effects specifically will be described. The variable display effect and the reach effect described above, the notice effect before reaching the reach, the stored number display effect, the in-all-player effect and the like are all controlled through the following control processing.

[Effect control processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in the timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from the reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (e.g., a cycle of several tens of microseconds to a few ms) while executing the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), operation memory effect management process (step S401), effect pattern management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), sound drive The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number updating processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. Note that the command for effect sent from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special drawing destination determination effect command, a special symbol operation memory number increase effect command, a special symbol operation memory number decrease effect command, a starting opening Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state specification command, round number command, error notification command, big hit end production command, number cut There are a counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability variation area passage command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the above-mentioned stored number display effect or the execution of the advance notice effect using markers M1 and M2. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the contents of the presentation. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occurrence, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of operation memories for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol , An operation memory effect pattern number, a predictive advance notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change time advance effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, etc. based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive processing, the effect control CPU 126 sends the sound drive circuit 134 the contents of the effect (for example, the BGM during the transition display effect, the mode transition effect, the big hit effect, voice data, etc.) To direct. Thereby, the sound according to the contents of presentation is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number updating process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like. There are other special effect random numbers for determining whether or not to execute special effects.

  Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the drive IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and performs rendering independently or synchronously with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42.

  Through the above-described effect control processing, the effect control CPU 126 can control the effects of the pachinko machine 1 in an integrated manner. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Operational memory effect management process]
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the effect memory number increase effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect memory number increase effect command is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect memory number increase effect command is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If the effect memory number increase effect command can not be confirmed (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number increase effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect that causes the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be displayed.

  Other settings related to pre-reading effects are also made. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the operation memory number decrease effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect memory number reduction effect command is stored. When it is confirmed that the operation memory number decrease effect command is stored (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If the effect memory number reduction effect command can not be confirmed (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number decrease effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and an effect of deleting the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Effective memory number increase effect selection process]
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation memory number increase effect selection process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S710: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the previous determination of the new operation memory corresponds to a big hit. As a result of this confirmation, when it corresponds to a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S712. On the other hand, when it does not correspond to a big hit (No), production control CPU126 performs Step S722 next.

  Step S712: The effect control CPU 126 draws the pre-read effect. Specifically, it is selectively determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and if it is to be performed, which of the plurality of pre-reading effects defined is to be performed. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S714.

  Step S714: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the pre-reading effect lottery has won the execution of the second special pre-reading effect. As a result of this confirmation, when the game is won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S716. On the other hand, if the game has not been won (No), the effect control CPU 126 then executes step S722.

  Step S716, Step S718, Step S720: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the number of operation memories and the type of the big hit, and creates an effect scenario of the second look-ahead effect based on the confirmed result. For example, an effect scenario of the effect example shown in FIGS. 62 to 66 is created. Specifically, the number of balls scheduled to be acquired in the big hit and the number of times the variable display is performed are confirmed, and the number of balls displayed at the time of the change and the number of balls displayed at the time of the previous change are determined. At the same time, after determining the number of times of displaying the number of balls and the number of balls for each display, a rendering scenario of a second pre-reading effect to be executed is created. Then, based on the created rendering scenario, a setting is performed to execute the second look-ahead rendering in the previous change and the change scheduled to be performed from now.

  Step S722: The effect control CPU 126 performs other effect setting. For example, the effect of displaying the markers M1 and M2 and the execution of the pre-reading effect are set.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action storage effect management process (FIG. 71).

[Reproduction symbol management processing]
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of effect design management processing. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection processing (step S500), effect symbol pre-processing (step S502), effect symbol in-progress processing (step S504), effect symbol display-in-progress processing (step S506) and the variable winning device in operation. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the address of the return destination. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol in-progress process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol in-process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the process of displaying the effect design stop (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device activation process (step S508) is performed when the big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 18) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 18). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 carries out an operation for adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the advance effect (reach other than the advance notice effect pattern) Select a pre-occurrence alert pattern, a post-reach occurrence alert pattern, etc. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls demonstration effects when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called wait-for-guest state. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the effect switching button 45 while executing the variable display effect using the effect design, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button by the player, and the effect according to the result The control information of the content (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variation display effect which has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the player can be taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) the result of the internal lottery to the effect (pattern effect execution) means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of the small hit, the stop display effect is executed in the same manner as or similar to the disconnection.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device activation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the in-all-effects effect in accordance with various conditions (for example, winning types). For example, in the case of a 9 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 9 round big playing effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) . As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an image of an effect during a big game is displayed, and the contents of the effect are changed as the round progresses.

  In addition, as the effect during the big hit of this variable winning device operation process, based on the command regarding the winning ball to be obtained during the big hit transmitted from the main control unit 70, create information about the number of winning balls, and save it in the RAM 130 Do. The information on the number of winnings acquired is, for example, reset at the start of the big hit when the big hit when the gaming state is normal (low probability non-time shortening state), and adds up the number of winning balls obtained during the big hit thereafter It is created by going Therefore, if a big hit is performed continuously, it will be continuously added also about the number-of-ears acquisition. In addition, the information on the number of winning balls may be constantly displayed on the display screen during the jackpot, and may be updated each time the winning ball is performed. For example, an image such as “0 shot” may be displayed on the display screen at the start of the big hit, and “10 shots” or “20 shots” may be increased each time a winning ball is obtained. In addition, when it is not during the big hit, for example, the current acquisition number of balls may be displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen, or an image such as "700 shots" or "2700 shots" may be displayed. In addition, the information regarding this acquisition number of balls is utilized for the content of the special effect mentioned later, and the content of a specific process is further mentioned later, referring another flowchart.

  Further, as a process at the time of the big hit end of the variable winning device activation process, a process of setting a jackpot history effect to be used for a part of the background image in the display screen during the time reduction state is performed. Specifically, while displaying time-lapse number of history images related to the number of time-savings when a big hit occurs during time reduction state, the history background image intuitively represents the stage of occurrence of big hit against the progress degree of the game Perform processing to display. The specific contents of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Demonstration symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect pattern fluctuation pre-processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demonstration selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called wait-for-customer state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the end address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control processing as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output processing (step S404 in FIG. 70) and the lamp drive processing (step S406 in FIG. 70). Do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is out (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. In addition to the lottery result command, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is out based on the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to an out-of-order normal fluctuation or an out-of-reach reach fluctuation, it can be determined that the present fluctuation is an out-of-order. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (unsatisfactory) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 then confirms whether or not the present variation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since the remaining is only the lottery result command at the time of small hit, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. In addition, it is also possible to check whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a big hit variation, it can be determined that the present variation is a big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big hit symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes small hit time fluctuation effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the change pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 may select the effect pattern number corresponding to the change pattern command at that time with reference to the effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The effect pattern numbers may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  In addition, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the fluctuation pattern of the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern number at that time (type of fluctuation time and reach and reach occurrence timing), stop Determine the display mode etc. In addition, the kind of the production | presentation pattern determined here corresponds to "combination of the pattern at the time of a small hit" altogether.

  The above procedure corresponds to "small hit", but when it corresponds to big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. The specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms in step S604 that there is a shift (Yes), next, step S612 is executed.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off time fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines an effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of the departure are classified into, for example, “a normal change in occurrence”, “time-to-day variation”, “a change in reach variation”, etc. Further, “reach change variation” defines a fine reach variation pattern. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the fluctuation pattern of the effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (if there is fluctuation time or reach occurrence, reach occurrence Determines the reach type and the reach occurrence timing) and the stop display mode (for example, "7"-"2"-"4" etc.). The specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When one of the processes in step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The contents of the advance notice effect are determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) or the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time shortening state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that the reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low when the player is not winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set relatively high to increase the player's expectation when the game is won.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes mode effect management processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is "normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, a background image shown in (B) in FIG. 46) in which a female character is sitting on a lounge. Execute the process to In addition, when the stay mode is "firework rush (high probability time shortening state)", the effect control CPU 126 performs processing for selecting a background image (for example, a background image shown in (A) in FIG. 51) having a fireworks motif. Run. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortening state)”, the effect control CPU 126 selects a background image with a coast motif (for example, a background image shown in (A) in FIG. 57). Run.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent process during the production symbol fluctuation (step S504 in FIG. 73), the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types A notice effect is performed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are performed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect executing means).

[Big win time fluctuation production pattern selection processing]
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned big hit time fluctuation production pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a fluctuation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is a high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802, and if the internal state is not a high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S804. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS. 52 to 55 and the like is executed.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the reach effect is performed in the coast mode, and a process of selecting an effect to be a big hit is performed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG. 47 and the like is executed.

  Then, when the processing in any of step S804, step S806 or step S808 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 74).

[Fireworks rush jackpot effect pattern selection process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection processing. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special look-ahead effect has been executed for the change. As a result of this confirmation, when the second special pre-reading effect is executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S822. On the other hand, when the second special pre-reading effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S830.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 loads an effect scenario of the second special look-ahead effect. Specifically, the content of the effect in the change is confirmed. For example, the number of times of displaying the number of balls, the value of the number of balls in the case of displaying, and the content of the special effect design displayed at the end of the effect are confirmed. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a big hit exists in the hold. As a result of this confirmation, if a big hit exists (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 then executes step S826. On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 then executes step S828.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 replaces the effect contents at the end of the effect. Specifically, after confirming the number of balls scheduled to be acquired in the big hit within the hold, and displaying a special effect pattern in which the number of balls scheduled to be obtained for the big hit of the change is displayed, It is changed to the contents of an effect such as displaying another special effect design symbol in which the number of balls that is calculated by adding the number of balls scheduled to be acquired is indicated. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 sets the execution of the effect based on the effect scenario. Specifically, the execution of the effect based on the effect scenario loaded in step S8282 and the effect scenario based on the effect scenario in which the effect contents at the end of the effect are replaced in step S826 is set. After this process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 75).

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 loads the fluctuation pattern. Thereby, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of this time, that is, the presentation time can be confirmed. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S832.

  Step S832: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the special effect can be executed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is possible to execute the special effect prepared in advance in the current effect time confirmed in the previous process (step S830). As a result of this confirmation, when the special effect can be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S834. On the other hand, when the special effect can not be executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S844.

  Step S834: The effect control CPU 126 loads a special effect random number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 loads the special effect random number updated in the previous process (step S410). Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S 835.

  Step S834: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the history background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, does the history background image indicate the current condition (red) or the current condition (blue)? Check if it represents a good or not bad situation (green). A correction may be made in the special effect drawing (step S 836) based on the result of this confirmation. Specifically, if the situation is good, increase the ratio for executing the special effect lottery (for example, about twice), and if the situation is not good, decrease the ratio for execution (for example, 0.5 times) Degree), if the situation is good or not bad, it may be corrected not adjusting the ratio to be executed. This makes it easy to execute a special effect in which the number of acquired balls is displayed as a special effect pattern in a well-behaved situation, and encourages the situation from now on to be a well-bent and easy to be a big hit with a short rotation speed. can do. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S836.

  Step S836: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the special effect using the special effect random number loaded in the previous process (step S 834). Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S838.

  Step S838: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not to execute the special effect. Specifically, the result of the special effect drawing of the previous process (step S836) is confirmed. As a result of this confirmation, when the special effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S840. On the other hand, when the special effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S844.

  Step S840: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the current number of balls. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 loads the information on the acquired number of balls stored in the RAM 130, and confirms the number of balls at the current time. The information on the number of winning balls is updated in the variable winning device activation process. For example, information on the number of acquired balls such as "700 shots" and "2700 shots" is confirmed. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S842.

  Step S842: The effect control CPU 126 sets the execution of the special effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines the content of the special effect based on the information on the acquired number of balls confirmed in the previous process (step S 840), and performs setting to execute the effect content. In addition, when the contents of the special effects require information on the number of balls that can be acquired during the present big hit, the contents will be determined after confirming the type of the big hit.

  For example, when the information on the number of winnings is “2700,” the information on the number of winnings is represented by the numbers “27” in the hundreds or more, the number “0” in the tens, and the ones The new special left directing design "27", the special middle directing design "0", and the special right directing design "0 shot" are divided into the number "0", and these new specials are created. Determine the contents of the special effects by the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and make settings to be performed. As the contents of this special effect, as described in the effect example, the special left effect pattern is stopped during the fluctuation display effect by the left, middle and right effect symbols at the normal time, and then the special right effect pattern is It is the contents that it stops and the special middle effect pattern stops at the end. Besides, after that, the number of award balls obtainable (for example, 2000 shots) is confirmed in the big hit which will be performed from now on, and the special effect design pattern "20", "0", " Displayed as "0 shot" and newly added the special directing pattern "47", "0", "0 shot" with the number of balls obtained by finally adding the number of obtained balls and the number of award balls that can be obtained finally The content may be displayed as. In addition, in order to distinguish the left, middle and right staging design in which the number ("0"-"9") and female character in normal time are written, and the special left, middle and right staging design in special production The player may be clearly taught that the type of the effect symbol is different by changing the shape and color of the effect symbol.

  Step S844: The effect control CPU 126 sets the execution of other effects. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the content of the variable display effect by the left, middle and right effect symbols during normal times, the content of the reach effect, etc., and performs the setting to execute the determined effect content .

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect pattern fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 74). The beach mode big hit effect pattern selection process, the fireworks rush off effect pattern selection process described later and the beach mode off effect pattern selection process only differ in the contents of the effect to be determined, and the same procedure is followed. Since detailed description is omitted.

  As described above, by executing the special effect using the special effect pattern based on the information on the number of acquired balls, the impression of the acquired number of balls can be easily made to remain, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest for the game. Can.

[Time-of-hour variation effect pattern selection process]
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned out-of-time variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is a high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not a high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856, and if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the fireworks rush is out. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of disconnection shown in FIGS. 48 to 54 and the like is executed.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes the at-the-coast mode effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of disconnection shown in FIG. 57 and the like is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect pattern selection process when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of disconnection shown in FIG.

  Then, when the processing in any of step S854, step S856 or step S858 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 74).

[Fireworks rush time big hit history production setting processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of fireworks rush big hit history effect setting processing. The contents will be described below along the procedure example. In addition, this process is a process performed at the time of big hit completion of the variable winning device operation process, and as shown in FIG. 69, is a process of setting an image used for part of the background image at the time of fireworks rush . In addition, you may use for a part of background image also not only at the time of a fireworks rush (high probability time shortening state) but also at the time of shore mode (low probability time shortening state).

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the number of times of the time of the current big hit. For example, if the gaming state is the normal state (low probability non-time shortening state), since the time shortening function is not operating, the number of time saving is 0 (so-called, first hit), and the time shortening state It is possible to check the number of times (one time to 170 times) at the time of the current big hit. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction number at the time of the big hit is zero. As a result of this confirmation, if it is 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S904. On the other hand, if it is not 0 times (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S910.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 clears the history information. Here, the history information includes time-lapse history, time-lapse history image, display mode, history background image, and is stored in the RAM. The time saving history is a history of time saving at the time of a big hit, and for example, 12 times, 34 times, 22 times, etc. are recorded. The time-savings history image represents an image corresponding to the time-savings history, and as shown in FIG. 67, when the time-savings are 1 to 4 times, it is an image in which the number of times corresponding to the gold icon is written. In addition, it is an image in which a red icon is used for 5 to 45 times, a green color for 46 to 90 times, a blue color for 91 to 166 times, and a black icon for 167 to 170 times. The display mode represents a display mode used as a background of the time-lapse history image, and represents a mode displayed in a single color or a mode displayed in a gradation. The history background image represents an image corresponding to the display mode, and as shown in FIG. 68, in the single color display mode, three types of red image, green image, and blue history background image are defined. In the gradation display mode, a history background image having a distribution of gradations based on the time-lapse image is defined. The effect control CPU 126 then executes step S906.

  Steps S906, S908: The effect control CPU 126 draws a display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether to use a single color display mode or a gradation display mode. Then, the display mode of the lottery result is set in the history information. Therefore, if it corresponds to a big hit in the time shortening state (the history information is not displayed because it is the first hit) that will be started after the end of the current big hit game, it will be set in the history information during the next time shortening state. The displayed mode will be used.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 reads out the history information. From the history information, information on time-lapse history, time-lapse history image, display mode, history background image can be obtained. In addition, when this time is a big hit in the time shortening state for the first time, the information only of a display mode is obtained and other information is not memorize | stored. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 sets the current time reduction number and the time reduction number history image to the history information. Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the type of display mode is the gradation display mode. As a result of this confirmation, in the case of the gradation display mode (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S918. On the other hand, if the single color display mode is selected (No), the effect control CPU 126 then executes step S916.

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 calculates the average number of times of time reduction based on the history information, and sets the history background image corresponding to the calculation result in the history information. For example, a red history background image is set if the average number of times of time reduction of history information is 1 to 45 times, and a green history background image is set if 46 to 90 times, and 91 to 170 If it is a blue history background image is set.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 calculates a gradation distribution based on the history information, and sets a history background image corresponding to the calculation result in the history information. For example, if it is blue at the first time history image position and red at the last (current time) time history image position, the display color changes from blue to red at the middle time position of the time history image. A historical background image consisting of the configured gradation distribution is set.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device activation process.
As described above, when the number of times of big hit in the time reduction state is reduced, that is, the number of changes after the end of the big hit is stored as a history, and when the history information is displayed on the screen, the background image is displayed. By expressing the display color on the basis of the number of time-to-time reductions, it is possible to intuitively display the stage at which the big hit has occurred with respect to the degree of progress of the game after the big hit. For example, when the big hit is obtained at an early stage (average time reduction is 1 to 45 times), the background image is made to be red to intuitively show that it is the best condition, or the big hit can be quickly obtained. If it is average or slow (average time is 46 to 90 times), by making the background image green, the tone is good or not bad and it is smooth, and it is intuitive that it is a game from here If the background image is blue, the tone is not so good and the tone may increase as well. Can be expressed intuitively. In addition, by displaying the gradation, it is possible to intuitively display the past and present tones.

  The present invention can be variously modified and carried out without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an illustration, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect mentioned above.

  In the embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are described as being disposed in the right strike area, but may be disposed in the left strike area.

  The images listed in the other presentation examples are merely examples, and these can be modified as appropriate. Further, the structure and board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 1 and specific numerical values are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it is needless to say that these can be appropriately modified.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable start winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal indicator 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 production control device 126 production control CPU

Claims (1)

Internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs;
Symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a mode representing the result of the internal lottery after variably displaying the symbol over a predetermined fluctuation time based on the execution of the internal lottery;
A special game execution means for executing a special game when the symbol display means displays symbols stopped in a predetermined winning mode by the symbol display means,
If the winning mode that triggered the execution of the special game corresponds to a special winning mode, the gaming state after the end of the special game is higher than the normal state in which winning is obtained with the normal frequency in the internal lottery Special state setting means for setting a special state in which winning is obtained in
It is determined that the consecutive conditions are satisfied when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the special winning mode is the consecutive state, and after the execution of the special game that triggered the setting of the special state, Regarding the fluctuation count history information representing the history regarding the number of fluctuation displays during the special state executed until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the special winning mode, each of the fluctuation counts corresponding to the plurality of consecutive special games Special effect execution means for executing effects for sequentially displaying history information;
A game machine characterized by comprising: